JP6491298B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows a player to clearly grasp that a variable display game has started.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a variable display game is executed based on a winning of a game ball at a start opening provided in a game area, and if the variable display game gives a special result, a special game advantageous to the player It is common to generate a state.

  Such a gaming machine has a variable display unit composed of a plurality of light emitting members (LEDs, etc.), and during a variable display game, the specific light emitting member of the variable display unit blinks to display the variable display. Is displayed, and the result of the variable display game is derived by finally lighting one or a plurality of light emitting members (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP 2009-045343 A JP 2011-217828 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, it is difficult for the player to clearly grasp that the variable display game has started.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to clearly grasp that a variable display game has started.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A display device having a variable display unit capable of executing a variable display game; and a control device that controls the variable display game;
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device,
The variation display unit is composed of a plurality of light emitting members,
The controller is
Displaying at least one light-emitting member among the plurality of light-emitting members to be in a light-emitting state in a predetermined order every predetermined time to display that the variable display game is being executed ;
During the execution of the variable display game, the light emitting mode is switched so that a certain number of the light emitting members are in the light emitting state, and the light emitting member adjacent to the light emitting member in the light emitting state is the light emitting member to be changed to the light emitting state next. Controlling the variation display unit by repeating a predetermined light emission pattern;
The off-line symbol displayed on the display device is constituted by the number of the light emitting members equal to the certain number,
The winning symbol displayed on the display device is constituted by the number of the light emitting members greater than the certain number,
The predetermined light emission pattern includes a light emission mode representing the off symbol and a plurality of light emission modes different from the winning symbol and the off symbol and representing a plurality of changing symbols that are not stopped and displayed. In the predetermined light emission pattern, the same light emission mode should not appear more than once ,
When the variable display game is started after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the variable display game is started after the loss symbol is stopped and displayed, it is displayed next to the symbol that is stopped. The light emission modes representing the changing symbols are the same .

  According to the present invention, it is possible for the player to clearly grasp that the variable display game has started.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a surrounding frame. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a front structural member. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the light emission effect device. (A) is a front view which shows the structure of the principal part of the light emission production | presentation apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing which follows the CC line in (a). (A) is a rear view which shows the structure of the principal part of the light emission effect | production apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing which follows the DD line | wire in (a). It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a back surface structural member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the lower effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a movable base member and a drive unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a lower movable unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the lower effect unit. (A) is a front view showing the structure of the lower effect unit when the left movable member and the right movable member are in a shielded state, and (b) is the lower effect unit when the left movable member and the right movable member are in a shielded state. It is a rear view which shows a structure. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the principal part of the lower production | presentation unit in case a left side movable member and a right side movable member are a shielding state. (A) is a front view showing the structure of the lower effect unit when the left movable member and the right movable member are exposed, and (b) is the lower effect unit when the left movable member and the right movable member are exposed. It is a rear view which shows a structure. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the principal part of a lower production | presentation unit in case a left side movable member and a right side movable member are an exposure state. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the side effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a side part movable unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a concealment movable part. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the principal part of a side part movable unit in case a movable decoration part is a shielding state. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the principal part of a side part movable unit in case a movable decoration part is an exposure state. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a side part production unit drive part. It is a rear view which shows structures, such as a side part movable unit in case a side part production unit is a 1st state. It is a rear view which shows structures, such as a side part movable unit in case a side part production unit is a 2nd state. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a surrounding frame. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the frame production | presentation apparatus of the state which removed the lower part production unit and the side part production unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the ball path member and the lower cover member from the frame production | presentation apparatus. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the detailed structure of the 1st movable member right position detection part of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the intermediate member and the 1st movable member from the frame production | presentation apparatus. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the detailed structure of the 2nd movable member right position detection part of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is the front view which looked at the frame body direction device from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the upper plate of the movement unit from the frame production | presentation apparatus shown in FIG. It is a top view which shows the state which looked at the movement unit shown in FIG. 34 from upper direction. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the drive mechanism of the 2nd movable member which removed the 1st movable member and the 1st slide shaft, the 1st motor, the 1st belt, and the 1st pulley from the moving unit. It is the front view which looked at the drive mechanism of the 2nd movable member of FIG. 36 from the front. It is the top view which looked at the drive mechanism of the 2nd movable member shown by FIG. 37 from upper direction. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the 2nd movable member of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 2nd movable member of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 2nd slider of the upper end part of a 2nd movable member. FIG. 42 is an enlarged perspective view illustrating a state in which the second slider of FIG. 41 is assembled and the second slide shaft is inserted. It is a back surface enlarged view of the state where the lid member was removed from the 2nd slider. It is an expansion perspective view of the lower horizontal support part provided in the lower end part of the 2nd movable member. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the flat wiring cable withdraw | derived from the 1st movable member and the 2nd movable member, and a relay board | substrate. It is the front view and bottom view which show the relationship between a flat wiring cable and a relay board | substrate when a 1st movable member moves to the left side and a 2nd movable member moves to the right side. (A) is a front perspective view showing the structure of the first special variable winning device, and (b) is a rear perspective view showing the structure of the first special variable winning device. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a 1st special fluctuation winning device. It is a front view which shows the structure of a base member. (A) is a front perspective view which shows the structure of a right linear lens part, (b) is a rear perspective view which shows the structure of a right linear lens part. (A) is a front perspective view which shows the structure of a left linear lens part, (b) is a rear perspective view which shows the structure of a left linear lens part. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a front decoration member, a left prize opening formation member, and a right prize opening formation member. (A) is a front view which shows the structure of a linear light emission part, (b) is sectional drawing which follows the AA line in (a). It is a modification of sectional drawing which follows the AA line in Fig.53 (a). It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart for demonstrating main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure game processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure normal process. It is a figure for demonstrating a jackpot symbol information table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation group selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation group selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation group selection table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating interruption processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 2nd main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a customer waiting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the selection table for 1st effect modes and the selection table for 2nd effect modes. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an accessory action pattern setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating an accessory operation | movement selection table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a prior determination command reception process. It is a figure for demonstrating a prior production distribution table. It is a figure which shows the example of a change of production mode (game mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the special operation | movement of a side part production unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special operation | movement of a side part production unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special operation | movement of a side part production unit. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a lower movable unit and a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a perspective view which shows the detailed structure of the collective display apparatus which has a special figure display used for the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the display state of the special figure 1 holding | maintenance display provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the display state of the special figure 2 holding | maintenance display provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the display state of the universal figure holding | maintenance display provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the display state of losing and winning in the common figure display provided in the collective display device. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern of the common map indicator provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the other example of the fluctuation pattern of the universal map display provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the variation start timing in the 2nd variation pattern of the usual display provided in the collective display apparatus, and the lighting state of LED. It is a perspective view which shows the display state of the round indicator provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the display state of the game status indicator provided in the collective display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of the "special figure per symbol" used for the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display, and the example of a "special figure lose pattern". It is a figure which shows the example of the "fluctuating symbol" used for the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the change start timing and special symbol in the 1st change pattern of a special figure change display game. It is a figure which shows the example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the example of the 3rd fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the example of the 4th fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the example of the 5th fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the example of the 6th fluctuation pattern (short-time fluctuation) of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the 6th fluctuation pattern (short-time fluctuation) of the special figure fluctuation display game in a special figure display. It is a front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 108 is a partially enlarged view of the game board shown in FIG. 107. It is a front view of another example of the game board in the third embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board shown in FIG. It is a side view of the game nail in a 3rd embodiment. It is side part sectional drawing of the part by which the game nail in 3rd Embodiment was planted. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board shown in FIG. 107 for demonstrating the modification in 3rd Embodiment. It is side part sectional drawing of the part by which the game nail in 4th Embodiment was planted. It is a figure explaining the 1st manufacturing method of the game machine in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 2nd manufacturing method of the game machine in a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view explaining the modification of the game nail in 4th Embodiment. It is a side view explaining the modification of the game nail in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the manufacturing method of the game machine in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 119 is an enlarged view of the distal end portion of the game nail in FIGS. 119 (b) and (c).

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15. On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  In addition, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. There are provided a tray ball outlet 22, a lower plate 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player turns the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to be played on the game area 32 (see FIG. 2). Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened is performed in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can do. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a prepaid card is discharged from a ball lending button 27 operated when a player receives a ball lending from a ball lending machine adjacent to the player, and a card unit of the ball lending machine. For this purpose, a discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, an enclosing frame (center case) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged in the approximate center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the surrounding frame body 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the surrounding frame body 40. That is, the surrounding frame body 40 surrounds the display area R of the display device 41, and is formed so as to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41 and prevent a game ball from jumping in from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display). In an area (display area R) in which an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. The On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

A normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided on the left side of the surrounding frame 40 in the game area 32. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the surrounding frame body 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the surrounding frame body 40.
In each of the general winning ports 35,..., A winning port switch 35a (see FIG. 55) for detecting a game ball won in each general winning port 35 is disposed.
In addition, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided below the surrounding frame body 40, and an inverted “C” is formed in the upper part immediately below the opening winning opening 36. An ordinary variable winning device (general power) 37 having a pair of movable members 37b, 37b that open and convert to a state in which a game ball can easily flow in and that has a second start winning opening is provided.

The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is normally held in a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state.
When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal variation prize is opened by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 55) as a drive device in a reverse “C” shape. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 and a second special variable winning device that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. (Big prize opening) 39.
The first special variable winning device 38 is disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and a special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. As a result of this, the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) is changed to the open state (state advantageous to the player).

That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 55) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player.
In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 55) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the first special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 (winning area). Has been.
Below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 32a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

The second special variation winning device 39 is disposed on the upper left side of the surrounding frame body 40. The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left side. As a result, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player).
That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a big prize opening opened and closed by an opening / closing member 39c driven by a big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 55) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state, By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player.

Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 55) serving as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the second special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 39 (winning area). Has been.
In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (for example, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 that form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for executing a common figure variable display game triggered by winning a prize at one place.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) and a second special figure fluctuation for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display section for display games (special figure 2 display), the fluctuation display section for general figure fluctuation display games (common figure display) composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp And a memory display unit for informing the start memory number of each variable display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs, and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) that informs the occurrence of the big hit. A second game state display unit (second game state display), a probability state display unit (third game state display) that displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A round display unit for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times of opening / closing the first special variable winning device 38) is provided.

The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, the central segment is displayed. Display blinking drive to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode other than the result mode (for example, the numbers “3” and “7”) in a lit state.
The universal display displays the fact that the light is changing by blinking the lamp during the change. When the game result is “out of”, for example, the lamp is turned off, and when the game result is “hit”, the lamp is turned on to display the game result.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display. Specifically, when the number of hold is “0”, all four lamps are turned off, and when the number of hold is “1”, only lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of holdings is “3”, the lamps 1, 2 and 3 are turned on. When the number of holdings is “4”, 4 is set. All the lamps 1 to 4 are turned on.
The special figure 2 hold indicator shows the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) as the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator, similar to the special figure 1 hold indicator. To display.

  The general map hold indicator displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the general map start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of hold is “2”, lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of hold is “3”, lamp 1 is blinked, lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of hold is “4”. Lamps 1 and 2 are blinked.

For example, the first game state indicator turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred.
For example, the second gaming state indicator turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the time-short state occurs.
For example, the probability state display unit turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Turns on the lamp.
For example, the round display unit turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the first special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or flows into the out port 32 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the first special variable winning apparatus 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is paid out. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 55), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 55) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal start gate is provided in the normal start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the passage 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played.
In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50.
In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (a general map specifying result) is derived by winning the normal map change display game.

The usual map variation display game is executed by a variation display unit (common diagram display) provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general and normal symbols) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information is displayed by blinking this LED. The fluctuation display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.
Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, which is displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the normal map change display game results in the normal map specifying result, it becomes a hit of the normal map, and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is in a predetermined time (for example, if the normal map low probability state). The open state is opened for 0.3 seconds (0.8 seconds in the case of a normal high probability state). This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the random number value extracted at the time of detection of the passage to the universal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure indicator stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, in the normal variation winning device 37, the built-in power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 55) is driven, so that the movable member 37b has a predetermined time (for example, 0.3% in the normal low probability state). The game ball is converted into a state where it is released only for 0.8 seconds if it is a normal high probability state, and winning of a game ball is allowed.

The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four).
Further, at the time of detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted, and the extracted random number value is stored in a special figure in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 55). Each area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display section (the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the surrounding frame body. Also on the display device 41 of 40, it is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 is based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof, the special figure 1 display (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display (variation display device). The first or second special figure variation display game is performed.
The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41 corresponding to each special figure variation display game. It has come to be.
As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state (so-called, Big hit state). Correspondingly, the display mode (stop result mode) of the display device 41 is also a special result mode.
That is, the display device (image display device) 41 serves as an auxiliary game device capable of executing a predetermined auxiliary game (in this embodiment, a variable display game).

  For example, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, first, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers or the like is displayed in the left fluctuation display region (first special symbol) and the right fluctuation display region (second special display). In each of the symbols) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game by the stop result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  Note that the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display may be separate displays or the same display. Is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the special game variable display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the game machine 10 with the special map 1 display and the special map 2 display.

Further, the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure fluctuation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is supposed to be executed.
In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one.

On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in the special game state or in the special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory.
In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning award port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a. Includes a flow path switch (described later) in the warp flow path 604, a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact type magnetic proximity that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Further, the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the detailed structure of the surrounding frame (so-called center case) 40 will be described.
FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the surrounding frame body 40 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 3, the surrounding frame body 40 includes a back surface constituent member (control unit) 700 provided with a display device 41 and the like, a front surface constituent member (front side decoration unit) 600 attached to the front surface of the back surface constituent member 700, Consists of.
FIG. 4 shows a detailed structure of the front structural member 600 of the center case. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the front structural member 600 as viewed from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 4, the front structural member 600 of the center case has a frame shape in which an opening 600 a is formed, and after the game ball rolls on the lower portion of the front structural member 600, the surrounding frame body A stage 601 is provided to flow down below 40.
The stage 601 includes a partition member 602 that partitions the region where the game ball on the stage 601 rolls and the opening 600 a of the front component member 600, and the game ball that rolls on the stage 601 on the surrounding frame body 40. A guide channel 603 that can flow downward is provided.
The partition member 602 mainly includes a flange portion 602a disposed so as to face the upper surface of the stage 601 with an interval at which at least a game ball can roll, and a lower end of the lower surface of the flange portion 602a. And a back wall portion 602b disposed over the rear end portion of the upper surface.

  The guide channel 603 is provided from a substantially central portion of the front surface of the back wall portion 602b of the partition member 602 to a substantially central portion of the front surface of the stage 601, and inside the enclosure frame 40 (between the stage 601 and the flange portion 602a). And a portion of the front surface of the stage 601 that is above the start winning opening 36 (specifically, substantially at the center of the front surface of the stage 601) and outside the surrounding frame body 40. A flow path having a guide outlet 603b that opens and communicates between the guide inlet 603a and the guide outlet 603b. That is, the stage 601 encloses the game ball that has flowed into the guide introduction port 603a opened inside the surrounding frame body 40 via the guide outlet port 603b opened on the front surface of the surrounding frame body 40 by the guide channel 603. It is configured such that it can be guided directly above the start winning opening 36 outside the frame body 40.

The front component member 600 includes a warp channel 604 that can guide the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the surrounding frame body 40 on the left side of the front component member 600.
The warp flow path 604 is provided on the upper left side of the front structural member 600 and opens toward the outside of the surrounding frame body 40, and the warp channel 604 is provided on the lower left side of the front structural member 600 and inside the surrounding frame body 40. It is a flow path that has a warp outlet 604b that opens toward the stage (specifically, between the stage 601 and the flange 602a) and communicates the warp inlet 604a and the warp outlet 604b. That is, the front component member 600 causes the game ball that has flowed into the warp inlet 604a opened on the left side surface of the surrounding frame body 40 to pass through the warp outlet 604b opened inside the surrounding frame body 40 by the warp channel 604. It is comprised so that it can guide | invade on the stage 601 (ball rolling part) inside the surrounding frame 40. FIG.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 is arranged on the front opening recessed chamber-shaped enclosure frame 40 facing the game area 32 formed on the game board 30 and the portion of the game area 32 positioned below the enclosure frame 40. A winning opening (start winning opening 36), a stage 601 on which a game ball can roll, a warp channel 604 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the stage 601, and a stage 601 And a guide channel 603 capable of guiding the game ball rolling down to the bottom of the surrounding frame body 40 and guiding it directly above the winning opening (start winning port 36).

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, on the upper left side of the front structural member 600, a flange portion 600 b for attaching the surrounding frame body 40 to the main body of the game board 30 composed of a plywood board or the like, and a game ball are provided on the display device 41. An armor portion 600c and the like are provided for guiding to flow down the left side or the right side.
Further, the front component member 600 includes a second special variable winning device 39 on the upper left side of the front component member 600.

FIG. 5 shows the detailed structure of the second special variable winning device 39. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the second special variable winning device 39 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 5, the second special variation winning device 39 includes an opening / closing member 39c that is rotatable in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left side, and an attacker that covers from the front a large winning opening provided in the second special variation winning device 39. The decorative member 39d, a winning ball discharge port 39e for discharging the game ball that has flowed into the grand prize winning port to the outside of the front constituent member 600, and the gaming ball that has flowed into the big winning port to the winning ball discharge port 39e And an upper winning ball flow path 39f for guiding.
Here, since the opening / closing member 39c and the attacker decoration member 39d are disposed in front of the flange portion 600b, the opening / closing member 39c and the attacker decoration member 39d can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine 10 without being obstructed by the game board 30 main body or the like. On the other hand, the winning ball discharge port 39e is disposed on the rear side of the flange portion 600b, and the upper winning ball flow passage 39f is provided inside the front component 600, so that it can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10. Can not do it.

As shown in FIG. 4, the front structural member 600 includes a light emission effect device 610 on the right side of the front structural member 600.
FIG. 6 shows the detailed structure of the light emission effect device 610. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect device 610 as seen from the front side.
7 and 8 show the detailed structure of the main part of the light emission effect device 610. FIG. 7A is a front view of the main part of the light emitting effect device 610, and FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 7A. Fig.8 (a) is a rear view of the principal part of the light emission effect device 610, FIG.8 (b) is sectional drawing which follows the DD line | wire in Fig.8 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 6, the light emitting effect device 610 mainly includes a first light guide plate (first strange plate) 611 and a second light guide plate (second strange plate) disposed behind the first light guide plate 611. ) 612, a lower LED substrate 613 disposed below the first light guide plate 611 and the second light guide plate 612, and a side LED disposed on the right side of the first light guide plate 611 and the second light guide plate 612. A substrate 614, a light guide plate base member 615 for supporting the first light guide plate 611, the second light guide plate 612, and the like, and a right portion of the surrounding frame body 40 disposed behind the second light guide plate 612 are guided by the first guide. A back decoration member 616 for decorating from behind the light plate 611 and the second light guide plate 612, and a back lens member 617 disposed behind the back decoration member 616 and capable of transmitting light from the display device 41 are provided. Composed. The light emitting effect device 610 is attached to the front decorative member 600d for decorating the right side portion of the surrounding frame body 40 and forming the right side portion of the front structural member 600.

When light enters the first light guide plate 611 from the end face of the first light guide plate 611, characters, images, etc. for identifying the first effect mode (first game mode) (in the case of this embodiment, “Imperial A light emission pattern composed of fine irregularities is applied by laser processing or the like so that the character “)” appears. Thus, the light emitting effect device 610 can display patterns such as characters and images for identifying the first effect mode (first game mode) so that the player can visually recognize the light effect.
Further, when light enters the second light guide plate 612 from the end face of the second light guide plate 612, characters or images for identifying the second effect mode (second game mode) (in the case of the present embodiment, A light emission pattern consisting of fine irregularities is applied by laser processing or the like so that the word “Alliance” appears. Thereby, the light emitting effect device 610 can display patterns such as characters and images for identifying the second effect mode (second game mode) so that the player can visually recognize it.

  7 and 8, a plurality of lower LEDs 613a are provided on the lower LED substrate 613, and a plurality of side LEDs 614a are provided on the side LED substrate 614. Also, the lower LED board 613 and the side LED board 614 have a game mode (effect mode) for executing a game effect as a first game mode (first effect mode) or a second game mode (second effect mode). Connectors 613b and 614b are provided for electrical connection with the effect control device 300 as a game mode setting means that can be set to the above.

In the present embodiment, the light from the lower LED 613 a is made incident into the first light guide plate 611, and the light from the side LED 614 a is made incident into the second light guide plate 612.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the lower LED 613 a faces the lower surface of the first light guide plate 611 (the surface of the first light guide plate 611 facing the lower LED substrate 613), but the second light guide plate. It is arranged on the lower LED substrate 613 so as not to face the lower surface of 612 (the surface of the second light guide plate 612 facing the lower LED substrate 613).
As shown in FIG. 8, the side LED 614 a faces the right surface of the second light guide plate 612 (the surface of the second light guide plate 612 that faces the side LED substrate 614), but the first light guide plate 611. Is disposed on the side LED substrate 614 so as not to face the right surface (the surface of the first light guide plate 611 facing the side LED substrate 614). Here, by using a highly directional LED (in this embodiment, a particularly directional chip LED) as a light source, light from the lower LED 613a is incident on the first light guide plate 611, but from the side LED 614a. Is not incident (or difficult to be incident). Further, the light from the side LED 614a is incident on the second light guide plate 612, but the light from the lower LED 613a is not incident (or is difficult to be incident).

Further, the right end portion of the first light guide plate 611 (the end portion of the first light guide plate 611 facing the side LED substrate 614) is configured to restrict light incident (incident light) from the side LED 614a. One incident restricting portion 611a is provided. Further, a second incident for restricting incidence (incident light) of the light from the lower LED 613a to the lower end portion of the second light guide plate 612 (the end portion of the second light guide plate 612 facing the lower LED substrate 613). A restricting portion 612a is provided. Thereby, the incidence of light from the side LED 614a on the first light guide plate 611 and the incidence of light from the lower LED 613a on the second light guide plate 612 can be effectively suppressed.
In the present embodiment, the end of the first light guide plate 611 and the end of the second light guide plate 612 are made to coincide with each other in consideration of increasing the efficiency of the assembly work, and the right side of the first light guide plate 611 is the side portion. Although the first incident restricting portion 611a is formed by notching the right end portion of the first light guide plate 611 so as to move away from the LED 614a, the configuration of the first incident restricting portion 611a can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, a resin that does not transmit light (or hardly transmits light) that covers the right end portion of the first light guide plate 611 may be used as the first incident restricting portion 611a. Similarly, the configuration of the second incident restricting portion 612a of the second light guide plate 612 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, a separation rib 612 b that protrudes toward the front side (the first light guide plate 611 side) is provided at the front upper end portion and the front lower end portion of the second light guide plate 612. That is, when the first light guide plate 611 and the second light guide plate 612 are overlapped (overlapped), a gap is formed between the first light guide plate 611 and the second light guide plate 612. Has been. Thereby, the incidence of light from the side LED 614a on the first light guide plate 611 and the incidence of light from the lower LED 613a on the second light guide plate 612 can be more effectively suppressed.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 includes a mode display unit (light emission effect device 610) for displaying the game mode (effect mode) set by the game mode setting means (effect control device 300).
Then, the mode display unit (light emission effect device 610) is configured to display the identification pattern corresponding to the first game mode (first effect mode) by bending the light incident from the end face (in the case of the present embodiment). , The first light guide plate 611 formed with a letter “Imperial”, and a first light emitting unit (lower LED 613a) that is disposed to face the end surface of the first light guide plate 611 and makes light incident on the first light guide plate 611. The second pattern (in the case of this embodiment, which is superposed on the first light guide plate 611, bends the light incident from the end face and performs identification display corresponding to the second game mode (second effect mode). A second light-emitting plate (side LED 614a) that is disposed opposite to the end surface of the second light-guide plate 612 and that makes light incident on the second light-guide plate 612; A first light guide The incident direction of light and the incident direction of light into the second light guide plate 612 has a first light emitting portion (lower LED613a) second light-emitting portion (side LED614a) arranged differently to 611. The first light guide plate 611 is provided with a first incident restricting portion 611a that restricts the incidence of the light emitted by the second light emitting portion at a portion corresponding to the second light emitting portion (side LED 614a). The light plate 612 is provided with a second incident restricting portion 612a that restricts the incidence of light emitted by the first light emitting portion at a portion corresponding to the first light emitting portion (lower LED 613a).

In the present embodiment, the first light emitting unit is disposed at a position facing the lower end surface of the first light guide plate 611, and the second light emitting unit is disposed at a position facing the right end surface of the second light guide plate 612. However, the positions of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit can be arbitrarily changed as long as light is not irradiated in the same direction. Further, the positions of the first incident restricting portion 611a and the second incident restricting portion 612a can be arbitrarily arbitrarily changed according to the positions of the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion.
Further, the mode display unit is not limited to the light emission effect device 610, and the configuration can be arbitrarily changed as long as the set game mode (effect mode) can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the mode display unit can be configured with a liquid crystal display or the like provided separately from the display device 41.

FIG. 9 shows the detailed structure of the back surface component 700. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the back surface component 700 as viewed from the front surface side.
As shown in FIG. 9, the back surface component 700 mainly includes a control base member 710 having a frame shape in which an opening 710 a is formed, and a frame shape in which an opening 721 a is formed, and the opening of the control base member 710. The frame body effect device 430 mounted in the portion 710a and the display unit 730 mounted on the rear surface of the control base member 710 are configured.

The display unit 730 includes a display device 41 and a display control device 42 attached to the rear surface of the display device 41.
The display area R of the display device 41 (see FIG. 2) includes an opening 710a of the control base member 710 and an opening of the frame body effect device 430 (specifically, the effect base member 721 included in the frame effect device 430). It is visible from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the opening 721a) and the opening 600a of the front structural member 600.

FIG. 10 shows the detailed structure of the frame effect production device 430. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the frame body effect device 430 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 10, the frame body effect device 430 mainly includes an effect base member 721 having a frame shape in which an opening 721 a is formed, and a ball passage member 723 attached to the left front portion of the effect base member 721. A display unit partition effect unit 440 that is mounted on the upper portion of the effect base member 721 and can partition the display unit (display region R) of the display device 41 that is exposed from the opening 721a of the effect base member 721; And a side effect unit 900 attached to the front right part of the effect base member 721.

The ball passage member 723 communicates with the winning ball discharge port 39e (see FIG. 5) of the second special variable winning device 39 (or faces the winning ball discharge port 39e with an interval less than the diameter of the game ball). There is a winning ball introduction port 723a and a middle winning ball outlet port 723b that opens toward the left part of the lower effect unit 800, and the middle winning ball introduction port 723a communicates with the middle winning ball outlet port 723b. It is a flow path.
Further, a lower winning ball flow path 801 is provided on the left part of the lower effect unit 800. The lower prize winning ball flow path 801 communicates with the middle prize winning ball outlet 723b (or faces the middle prize winning ball outlet 723b with an interval less than the diameter of the game ball), and a surrounding frame. The lower winning ball outlet port 801b that opens toward the outside of the body 40 is a flow path that connects the lower winning ball inlet port 801a and the lower winning ball outlet port 801b.
That is, the back surface constituent member 700 is a game ball discharged to the outside of the front surface constituent member 600 by the ball passage member 723 and the lower winning ball flow path 801 through the winning ball discharge port 39e of the second special variable winning device 39. Is guided to the outside of the surrounding frame body 40 (the lower part on the back surface (rear surface) side of the game board 30) and discharged.

  The display section partition effect unit 440 includes rod-shaped movable partition members 48A and 48B that are slidable in the left-right direction within the opening 721a of the effect base member 721, and movable partition members 48A and 48B that are provided above the effect base member 721. Partition member drive motors 441A and 441B capable of generating a drive force for sliding the drive. In the display section partition effect unit 440, the movable partition members 48A and 48B slide in the left-right direction, so that the display area R of the display device 41 is partitioned left and right, and the display area R of the display device 41 is not partitioned. , Can be converted to.

FIG. 11 shows the detailed structure of the lower effect unit 800. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the lower effect unit 800 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 11, the lower rendering unit 800 is mainly disposed in the left and right movable base members 810 provided with the lower winning ball flow path 801 and the like, and in front of the movable base member 810. A lower movable unit 830 that executes a predetermined movable effect in a state, and a drive unit 820 that is mounted on the rear surface of the movable base member 810 and moves the lower movable unit 830.
Here, the lower effect unit 800 is disposed in the surrounding frame body 40 and forms a movable effect unit that performs a predetermined effect operation.
The movable effect unit (lower effect unit 800) includes a movable base member 810 fixed to the inside of the concave chamber of the surrounding frame body 40, and a movable unit (lower movable unit 830) supported movably by the movable base member 810. And a drive mechanism (drive unit 820) for moving the movable unit (lower movable unit 830).

FIG. 12 shows the detailed structure of the movable base member 810 and the drive unit 820. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the movable base member 810 and the drive unit 820 as seen from the rear side.
The drive unit 820 mainly includes a first movable arm 821 rotatably attached to the movable base member 810, and a first drive capable of generating a driving force for rotating the first movable arm 821. A solenoid 822, a first solenoid link member 823 for connecting the first movable arm 821 and the first drive solenoid 822, and a first solenoid for preventing the first movable arm 821 from being removed from the movable base member 810. The first retaining member 824, the second movable arm 825 that is rotatably mounted to the position on the right side of the mounting position of the first movable arm 821 in the movable base member 810, and the second movable arm 825 are rotated. A second driving solenoid 826 capable of generating a driving force for connecting the second movable arm 825 and the second driving solenoid 826. A second solenoid link member 827, and second movable arm 825 is provided with a second retaining member 828 for preventing the thus taken from the movable base member 810, a.

The first movable arm 821 is rotatable with respect to the movable base member 810.
Specifically, on the rear surface of the movable base member 810, a first arm rotation shaft portion 811 serving as a rotation shaft of the first movable arm 821 is projected toward the rear side. On the other hand, in the first movable arm 821, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the first movable arm 821 is a rotation free end portion and the other end side is a shaft-attached end portion, and the shaft-attached end portion of the first movable arm 821. Is provided with a through hole 821a through which the first arm rotation shaft portion 811 can be inserted. That is, the first movable arm 821 is pivotally attached to the first arm rotation shaft portion 811 protruding from the movable base member 810 through the through hole 821a, so that the first arm rotation shaft can be rotated. It is configured to be able to rotate around the portion 811.

As shown in FIG. 12, an engagement pin (protrusion) 821 b that protrudes from the rear surface of the first movable arm 821 toward the rear side is provided at the axial end portion of the first movable arm 821. . The first solenoid link member 823 attached to the tip of the plunger of the first drive solenoid 822 can be engaged with the engagement pin 821b of the first movable arm 821 (specifically, the engagement pin 821b). The engagement receiving portion 823a is provided. That is, the first solenoid link member 823 is configured to connect the shaft-attached end portion of the first movable arm 821 and the plunger of the first drive solenoid 822.
Further, the first drive solenoid 822 is attached to a first solenoid attachment portion 810 a provided on the left side of the movable base member 810 with respect to the mounting position of the first movable arm 821.

In the first movable arm 821, the longitudinal direction of the first movable arm 821 is substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction, and the rotation free end portion is on the inner side (right side) than the axially attached end portion of the first movable arm 821. It is configured to rotate in a direction in which the rotation free end side rises upward (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front side), with the position of the lateral orientation being positioned as an initial state.
That is, the first movable arm 821 is pivotally attached to the movable base member 810 and can be converted from a horizontal posture to a vertical posture by receiving the driving force of the first solenoid (first drive solenoid 822). Yes.

  Here, in the vicinity of the first arm rotation shaft portion 811 on the rear surface of the movable base member 810, a first arm guide hole 812 is formed in the rotation direction of the first movable arm 821 (along the rotation locus). A long slot is provided. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the through hole 821a in the front surface of the first movable arm 821, the first arm guide hole 812 can be slidably engaged (specifically, it can be inserted into the first arm guide hole 812). A protrusion (not shown) is provided. In other words, the first arm guide hole 812 is configured to assist the turning operation of the first movable arm 821 by the sliding movement of the protrusion of the first movable arm 821 along the first arm guide hole 812. ing. Thus, the first movable arm 821 can be reliably rotated in conjunction with the linear movement of the plunger of the first drive solenoid 822 in the left-right direction.

  The first movable arm 821 is attached to the movable base member 810, that is, the first arm rotation shaft portion 811 of the movable base member 810 is inserted into the through hole 821a of the first movable arm 821 and the first movable arm 821 is inserted into the first movable arm 821. The movable base member 810 and the first retaining member attached to the rear surface of the movable base member 810 in a state where the protrusion (not shown) of the movable arm 821 is inserted into the first arm guide hole 812 of the movable base member 810. 824 and 824. As a result, the first movable arm 821 can be prevented from coming off from the first arm rotation shaft portion 811.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the movable base member 810 has the first movable arm 821 attached to the movable base member 810 in a state where the first movable arm 821 is attached, and the movable base member 810 has the axially attached end portion side of the movable base member 810. It arrange | positions at the rear surface side, and it is comprised so that the rotation free end part side may be arrange | positioned at the front side of the said movable base member 810. FIG. An arcuate first cutout 813 is provided in a portion of the movable base member 810 that faces the track of the rotation free end of the first movable arm 821 that rotates.

Further, the second movable arm 825 is rotatable with respect to the movable base member 810.
Specifically, a second arm rotation shaft serving as a rotation shaft of the second movable arm 825 is located on the right side of the rear surface of the movable base member 810 with respect to the protruding position of the first arm rotation shaft portion 811. A portion 814 protrudes toward the rear side. On the other hand, in the second movable arm 825, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the second movable arm 825 is a rotation free end portion, and the other end side is a shaft attachment end portion, and the shaft attachment end portion of the second movable arm 825 is provided. Is provided with a through hole 825a through which the second arm rotation shaft portion 814 can be inserted. In other words, the second movable arm 825 is pivotally attached to the second arm rotation shaft portion 814 protruding from the movable base member 810 through the through hole 825a, so that the second arm rotation shaft can be rotated. It is configured to be able to rotate around the portion 814.

As shown in FIG. 12, an engagement pin (protrusion) 825 b that protrudes from the rear surface of the second movable arm 825 toward the rear side is provided at the axial end portion of the second movable arm 825. . The second solenoid link member 827 attached to the distal end of the plunger of the second drive solenoid 826 can be engaged with the engagement pin 825b of the second movable arm 825 (specifically, the engagement pin 825b). An engagement receiving portion 827a is provided. That is, the second solenoid link member 827 is configured to connect the shaft-attached end portion of the second movable arm 825 and the plunger of the second drive solenoid 826.
Further, the second drive solenoid 826 is attached to a second solenoid attachment portion 810b provided at a position on the right side of the movable base member 810 with respect to the mounting position of the second movable arm 825.

In the second movable arm 825, the longitudinal direction of the second movable arm 825 is substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction, and the rotation free end portion is on the inner side (left side) than the axially attached end portion of the second movable arm 825. It is configured to rotate in the direction in which the rotation free end side rises upward (clockwise direction when viewed from the front side), with the position of the lateral orientation being positioned as the initial state.
That is, the second movable arm 825 is pivotally attached to the movable base member 810, and can be converted from a horizontal posture into a vertical posture by receiving the driving force of the second solenoid (second drive solenoid 826). Yes.
As described above, the rotation direction from the initial state of the first movable arm 821 is the counterclockwise direction, and the rotation direction from the initial state of the second movable arm 825 is the clockwise direction.
That is, a direction (specifically, a direction in which the converted rotation direction (rotation direction) of the first movable arm 821 into the vertical orientation differs from a conversion rotation direction (rotation direction) of the second movable arm 825 in the vertical orientation (specifically, , Opposite direction).

  Here, in the vicinity of the second arm rotation shaft portion 814 on the rear surface of the movable base member 810, a second arm guide hole 815 is formed in the rotation direction of the second movable arm 825 (along the rotation locus). A long slot is provided. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the through hole 825a in the front surface of the second movable arm 825, the second arm guide hole 815 can be slidably engaged (specifically, it can be inserted into the second arm guide hole 815). A protrusion (not shown) is provided. That is, the second arm guide hole 815 is configured to assist the rotation operation of the second movable arm 825 by the sliding movement of the protrusion of the second movable arm 825 along the second arm guide hole 815. ing. Thus, the second movable arm 825 can be reliably rotated in conjunction with the linear movement of the plunger of the second drive solenoid 826 in the left-right direction.

  The second movable arm 825 is attached to the movable base member 810, that is, the second arm rotation shaft portion 814 of the movable base member 810 is inserted into the through hole 825 a of the second movable arm 825 and the second movable arm 825 is inserted into the second movable arm 825. 2 With the protrusion (not shown) of the movable arm 825 inserted into the second arm guide hole 815 of the movable base member 810, the movable base member 810 and the second retaining member attached to the rear surface of the movable base member 810 And 828. As a result, the second movable arm 825 can be prevented from coming off from the second arm rotation shaft portion 814.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the movable base member 810 has the second movable arm 825 attached to the movable base member 810 in the state where the second movable arm 825 is mounted, and the movable base member 810 has the axial end portion side of the movable base member 810. It arrange | positions at the rear surface side, and it is comprised so that the rotation free end part side may be arrange | positioned at the front side of the said movable base member 810. FIG. An arc-shaped second notch 816 is provided in a portion of the movable base member 810 that faces the track of the rotation free end of the second movable arm 825 that rotates.

FIG. 13 shows the detailed structure of the lower movable unit 830. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable unit 830 viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 14 shows the detailed structure of the lower effect unit 800. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the lower effect unit 800 as seen from the rear side.
The lower movable unit 830 mainly includes a movable lens member 831, an LED substrate 832 attached to the rear surface of the movable lens member 831, a left lateral slide guide member 833 and a right lateral slide disposed behind the movable lens member 831. The slide guide member 834 includes a left movable member 835 and a right movable member 836 that are disposed in front of the movable lens member 831.

The left movable member 835 is rotatable with respect to the movable base member 810 via the first movable arm 821.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a left arm connecting pin 835 a for connecting to the first movable arm 821 is provided at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the left movable member 835. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 821 c into which the distal end portion of the left arm connecting pin 835 a can be inserted is provided at the rotation free end portion of the first movable arm 821. That is, the left movable member 835 is configured such that it can be pivotally supported (mounted) on the rotation free end of the first movable arm 821 by inserting the left arm connecting pin 835a into the through hole 821c of the first movable arm 821. Yes. As a result, the left movable member 835 can rotate (swing) with respect to the movable base member 810 in conjunction with the rotation operation of the first movable arm 821.

Further, the right movable member 836 is rotatable with respect to the movable base member 810 via the second movable arm 825.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a right arm connecting pin 836 a for connecting to the second movable arm 825 is provided at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the right movable member 836. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 825 c into which the distal end portion of the right arm connecting pin 836 a can be inserted is provided at the rotation free end portion of the second movable arm 825. That is, the right movable member 836 is configured such that it can be pivotally supported (mounted) on the rotational free end of the second movable arm 825 by inserting the right arm connecting pin 836a into the through hole 825c of the second movable arm 825. Yes. As a result, the right movable member 836 can rotate (swing) with respect to the movable base member 810 in conjunction with the rotation operation of the second movable arm 825.

That is, the rotation free end of the first movable arm 821 is connected to the first sub movable member (left movable member 835), and the rotation free end of the second movable arm 825 is connected to the second sub movable member (right movable). By connecting to the member 836), the first sub movable member (the left movable member 835) and the second sub movable member (the right movable member 836) rotate the movable arm (the first movable arm 821, the second movable arm 825). It is configured to revolve with respect to the dynamic axis point.
Specifically, the first sub movable member (left movable member 835) is arranged in front of the main movable member (movable lens member 831), and the first movable arm 821 is converted from the horizontal posture to the vertical posture. Accordingly, the shield member moves in a direction away from the second sub movable member (right movable member 836) and shields a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the movable lens member 831 (specifically, a transmitted light emitting portion 831g (described later)). To the exposed state in which the substantially horizontal central portion (the transmitted light emitting portion 831g) is exposed.
Further, the second sub movable member (right movable member 836) is disposed in front of the main movable member (movable lens member 831), and the second movable arm 825 is changed in accordance with the conversion from the horizontal posture to the vertical posture. The left and right sides of the movable lens member 831 move in a direction away from the first sub movable member (left movable member 835) to shield the substantially central portion of the movable lens member 831 (specifically, the transmitted light emitting portion 831g (described later)). It is comprised so that it may convert into the exposure state which exposes the approximate direction center part (the said transmission light emission part 831g).

Further, the movable lens member 831 is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the movable base member 810, and the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are slid in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable lens member 831. It is possible.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the left pin insertion through which the left arm connection pin 835a of the left movable member 835 can be slidably inserted is inserted into the substantially vertical central portion of the left portion of the movable lens member 831. A long hole that is long in the left-right direction is provided as the hole 831a. That is, the left movable member 835 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the movable lens member 831 by sliding the left arm connecting pin 835a along the left pin insertion hole 831a of the movable lens member 831. Yes.

Further, a right pin insertion hole 831b through which the right arm connecting pin 836a of the right movable member 836 can be slidably inserted is formed in the right and left direction of the right portion of the movable lens member 831. A long hole is provided. That is, the right movable member 836 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the movable lens member 831 by sliding the right arm connecting pin 836a along the right pin insertion hole 831b of the movable lens member 831. Yes.
Here, when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 rotate with respect to the movable base member 810 to convert from the shielded state to the exposed state, the movable lens member 831 has a left arm connecting pin 835a. Is inserted into the left pin insertion hole 831a of the movable lens member 831 and the right arm connecting pin 836a of the right movable member 836 is inserted into the right pin insertion hole 831b of the movable lens member 831. It is done.

When the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are converted from the shielded state to the exposed state, the left arm connecting pin 835a and the right arm connecting pin 836a have circular arcs, but the left arm connecting pin 835a and the right arm connecting The pin 836a is not fixed to the movable lens member 831 but is merely slidably inserted into the left pin insertion hole 831a and the right pin insertion hole 831b of the movable lens member 831. The rotating direction of the movable member 835 to the exposed state is opposite to the rotating direction of the right movable member 836 to the exposed state.
Therefore, a lateral force (specifically, leftward) applied to the movable lens member 831 as the left movable member 835 is rotated to the exposed state (counterclockwise when viewed from the front side). Force) and a lateral force (specifically, a force applied to the movable lens member 831 accompanying a rotation operation to the exposed state of the right movable member 836 (a rotation operation clockwise when viewed from the front side)). , The force in the right direction) is canceled out, and only the upward force applied to the movable lens member 831 remains with these rotational operations.

  Similarly, when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are converted from the exposed state to the shielded state, the left movable member 835 is turned to the shielded state (the pivoting operation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side). ) In the horizontal direction (specifically, the force in the right direction) applied to the movable lens member 831 and the turning operation of the right movable member 836 to the shielding state (counterclockwise as viewed from the front side). The lateral force applied to the movable lens member 831 (specifically, the leftward force) is canceled with the rotation operation), and the downward movement applied to the movable lens member 831 with these rotation operations. Only the power of remains. Accordingly, the movable lens member 831 slides up and down with respect to the movable base member 810 in conjunction with the rotation of the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836.

  Further, as described above, the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are rotatable with respect to the movable base member 810, and the movable lens member 831 is rotated by the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836. The left and right movable members 835 and 836 rotate with respect to the movable lens member 831 because they can slide in the vertical direction relative to the movable base member 810 in conjunction with the movement operation. To slide left and right.

  That is, the movable lens member 831 is a main movable member supported by the movable base member 810 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the left movable member 835 is laterally moved to the left and right sides of the main movable member (movable lens member 831). A first sub-movable member supported so as to be movable to the right, and a right-side movable member 836 serving as a second sub-movable member supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction on the left and right other sides of the main movable member (movable lens member 831). Eggplant. Further, the first drive solenoid 822 serves as a first solenoid capable of generating a driving force for moving the first sub movable member (the left movable member 835), and the second drive solenoid 826 includes the second sub movable member 826. A second solenoid capable of generating a driving force for moving the movable member (the right movable member 836) is formed. The left movable member 835 may be the second sub movable member, the right movable member 836 may be the first sub movable member, the first drive solenoid 822 may be the second solenoid, and the second drive solenoid 826 may be the first solenoid.

The main movable member (movable lens member 831) is a movable arm (first movable arm 821, second movable member) formed by the first sub movable member (left movable member 835) and the second sub movable member (right movable member 836). The arm 825) is configured to move up and down in accordance with the revolving operation with respect to the rotation axis.
The lower movable unit 830 includes a left lateral slide guide member 833 in order to assist the left and right movable member 835 to slide in the horizontal direction relative to the movable lens member 831.

Specifically, the left lateral slide guide member 833 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction, and the left end portion and the right end portion of the left lateral slide guide member 833 have through holes for connecting to the left movable member 835, respectively. 833a and an insertion pin 833b are provided. On the other hand, on the lower surface of the rear surface of the left movable member 835 below the protruding position of the left arm coupling pin 835a, the left convex portion 835b whose tip can be screwed with the through hole 833a of the left lateral slide guide member 833 Is provided.
Further, the insertion pin 833b of the left lateral slide guide member 833 is arranged on the rear surface of the left movable member 835 on the right side of the protruding position of the left convex portion 835b so as to be aligned with the left convex portion 835b. A left-side recess 835c into which the front end portion of the left side can be inserted is provided. Furthermore, a left slide guide hole 831c is provided at a position below the arrangement position of the left pin insertion hole 831a in the movable lens member 831.

The left slide guide hole 831c is a long hole that is long in the left-right direction, and the left side portion of the left slide guide hole 831c has a width that allows the left convex portion 835b to be slidably inserted. The insertion pin 833b thinner than the left convex portion 835b can be slidably inserted in a portion on the right side of the left slide guide hole 831c in the right and left direction substantially center, but the left convex portion 835b cannot be inserted. It has a width.
That is, the left lateral slide guide member 833 has an insertion pin 833b inserted into the left concave portion 835c of the left movable member 835 and a left convex portion 835b of the left movable member 835 screwed with the through hole 833a to the left slide guide hole 831c. The left and right movable members 835 can be slid in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable lens member 831 so that the left and right sliding movements can be assisted.

Further, the lower movable unit 830 includes a right lateral slide guide member 834 for assisting the right and left movable member 836 to slide in the horizontal direction relative to the movable lens member 831.
Specifically, the right lateral slide guide member 834 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction, and the right and left end portions of the right lateral slide guide member 834 have through holes for connecting to the right movable member 836, respectively. 834a and an insertion pin 834b are provided. On the other hand, on the lower side of the rear surface of the right movable member 836 with respect to the protruding position of the right arm connecting pin 836a, the right convex portion 836b whose tip can be screwed to the through hole 834a of the right lateral slide guide member 834. Is provided.
Further, the insertion pin 834b of the right lateral slide guide member 834 is arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the right movable member 836 with respect to the protruding position of the right convex portion 836b so as to be lined up with the right convex portion 836b. Is provided with a right-side recess 836c into which the front end portion can be inserted. Further, a right slide guide hole 831d is provided at a position below the arrangement position of the right pin insertion hole 831b in the movable lens member 831.

The right slide guide hole 831d is a long hole extending in the left-right direction so as to be lined up with the left slide guide hole 831c in the left-right direction, and is a portion on the right side of the right-side slide guide hole 831d substantially at the center in the left-right direction. Has a width that allows the right convex portion 836b to be slidably inserted, and the insertion pin 834b, which is thinner than the right convex portion 836b, slides at the left side of the right slide guide hole 831d in the left-right approximate center. The right protrusion 836b can be inserted freely, but has a width that cannot be inserted.
That is, the right lateral slide guide member 834 has an insertion pin 834b inserted into the right concave portion 836c of the right movable member 836 and a right convex portion 836b of the right movable member 836 screwed to the through hole 834a with the right slide guide hole 831d. The right and left movable members 836 are configured to be slidable along the left and right sides so that the left and right sliding movements relative to the movable lens member 831 can be assisted.

Further, in order to assist the movable lens member 831 to slide in the vertical direction relative to the movable base member 810, the movable base member 810 is provided with vertical movement guide holes 817 and 817.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, an arc-shaped first notch provided in a portion of the movable base member 810 that faces the track of the rotation free end of the first movable arm 821 that rotates. Between the portion 813 and the arcuate second notch 816 provided in the portion facing the orbit of the rotation free end of the second movable arm 825 that rotates, the vertical movement guide hole 817, As a reference numeral 817, a pair of vertically long slots arranged in the left-right direction are provided.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, among the rear surfaces of the movable lens member 831, between the left pin insertion hole 831a and the left slide guide hole 831c, between the right pin insertion hole 831b and the right slide guide hole 831d, Each of them is provided with one guide receiving pin 831e that can be slidably inserted into the vertically moving guide hole 817.
That is, the vertical movement guide holes 817 and 817 slide the movable lens member 831 with respect to the movable base member 810 by sliding the guide receiving pins 831e and 831e along the vertical movement guide holes 817 and 817. It is configured to assist.
In addition, the guide receiving pin 831e is inserted into the vertical movement guide hole 817, and a washer (a retaining member) 820a having an outer diameter larger than the width of the vertical movement guide hole 817 at the tip of the guide receiving pin 831e. Is configured to be attached. As a result, the guide receiving pin 831e is prevented from coming out of the vertical movement guide hole 817.

Further, in order to assist the movable lens member 831 to slide in the vertical direction relative to the movable base member 810, the movable base member 810 is provided with vertical movement guide portions 818 and 818.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, vertical movement guide portions 818 and 818 are provided between one vertical movement guide hole 817 and the other vertical movement guide hole 817 on the front surface of the movable base member 810. A pair of protrusions that are long in the vertical direction are provided in the horizontal direction.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, at the lower end of the movable lens member 831, a guide receiving portion 831 f slidably engageable with the vertically moving guide portions 818 and 818 is provided projecting downward.
That is, the vertical movement guide portions 818 and 818 can assist the vertical sliding movement of the movable lens member 831 with respect to the movable base member 810 by the guide receiving portion 831f slidingly moving along the vertical movement guide portions 818 and 818. It is configured as follows.

The movable lens member 831 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light. The LED substrate 832 attached to the rear surface of the movable lens member 831 includes LEDs on the LED substrate 832 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED substrate 832). It is comprised so that light can be irradiated.
Note that the movable lens member 831 has, for example, a transmissive light emitting unit as long as at least the transmissive light emitting unit 831g provided at the substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the movable lens member 831 is illuminated by light from the rear of the movable lens member 831. Portions other than 831g may be covered with a reflective film (a reflective film formed by plating, vapor deposition, or the like).
That is, the LED substrate 832 constitutes an illumination device for irradiating the main movable member (movable lens member 831) with light from the rear, and the main movable member (movable lens member 831) is irradiated from the illumination device (LED substrate 832). A transmissive light emitting portion 831g that transmits the transmitted light is provided.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the transmitted light emitting unit 831g includes a shield light emitting unit 831h that can be shielded by the first sub movable member (the left movable member 835) and the second sub movable member (the right movable member 836), and a shield. And an exposed light emitting portion 831i that protrudes forward from the light emitting portion 831h and cannot be shielded by the first sub movable member (left movable member 835) and the second sub movable member (right movable member 836).
The exposed light emitting portion 831i intersects with the vertically long portion 831i1 sandwiched between the shielded first sub movable member (the left movable member 835) and the second sub movable member (the right movable member 836), and the vertically long portion 831i1. It is formed in a cross shape having a horizontally long portion 831i2.

The left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are configured not to transmit light (or to hardly transmit light).
And as shown to Fig.15 (a), a 1st sub movable member (left side movable member 835) and a 2nd sub movable member (right side movable member 836) are set to the vertically long part 831i1 of the light emission part 831i in the shielding state. Contact portions 835d and 836d that contact from the side, and engagement portions 835e and 836e that engage with the horizontally long portion 831i2 of the exposed light emitting portion 831i are provided. That is, in the shielded state, a cross-shaped surface is formed from the gap between the contact portion 835d and the engagement portions 835e and 835e of the left movable member 835 and the contact portion 836d and the engagement portions 836e and 836e of the right movable member 836. The light emitting / emitting unit 831i is configured to be exposed.

When the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state, as shown in FIG. 15A, portions of the movable lens member 831 other than the exposed light emitting portion 831i are the left movable member 835 and the right movable member. 836 is covered, and only the exposed light emitting portion 831i is exposed. On the other hand, when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are exposed, not only the exposed light emitting portion 831i of the movable lens member 831 but also the shielding light emitting portion 831h of the movable lens member 831 as shown in FIG. Will also be exposed.
Therefore, since the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are configured not to transmit light (or hardly transmit light), when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state. When the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in an exposed state, only the exposed light emitting unit 831i can be seen as if only the exposed light emitting unit 831i is illuminated by the light from the LED substrate 832. In addition, the shield light emitting portion 831h can also appear to be shining with the light from the LED substrate 832.

Here, the operation of the lower effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS.
15A is a front view of the lower rendering unit 800 when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state, and FIG. 15B is the left movable member 835 and the right movable member. FIG. 8B is a rear view of the lower effect unit 800 when 836 is in a shielding state. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the main part of the lower effect unit 800 when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state.
On the other hand, FIG. 17A is a front view of the lower rendering unit 800 when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are exposed, and FIG. 17B is the left movable member 835 and the right movable member. FIG. 8B is a rear view of the lower effect unit 800 when 836 is in an exposed state. FIG. 18 is a rear view of the main part of the lower effect unit 800 when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are exposed.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, when the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 are in the lateral orientation, the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielding state. At this time, the left arm connecting pin 835a of the left movable member 835 inserted into the through-hole 821c of the first movable arm 821 in the lateral orientation is substantially in contact with the right end portion of the left pin insertion hole 831a of the movable lens member 831 and is laterally oriented. The right arm connecting pin 836a of the right movable member 836 inserted into the through-hole 825c of the second movable arm 825 in the posture is substantially in contact with the left end portion of the right pin insertion hole 831b of the movable lens member 831.
Further, the insertion pin 833 b of the left lateral slide guide member 833 inserted into the left recess 835 c of the left movable member 835 substantially abuts on the right end of the left slide guide hole 831 c of the movable lens member 831, and the right side of the right movable member 836. The insertion pin 834b of the right lateral slide guide member 834 inserted into the recess 836c is substantially in contact with the left end portion of the right slide guide hole 831d of the movable lens member 831. Further, the guide receiving pin 831 e of the movable lens member 831 is substantially in contact with the lower end portion of the vertical movement guide hole 817 of the movable base member 810.

At this time, only the exposed light emitting part 831i is exposed in the transmitted light emitting part 831g of the movable lens member 831, so that only the exposed light emitting part 831i in the lower effect unit 800 can be seen to shine. it can.
Then, as shown in FIG. 16, when the plunger of the first drive solenoid 822 is pulled (the distal end of the plunger moves to the right when viewed from the rear surface side), the first movable arm 821 is in the lateral orientation. To vertical orientation. Further, when the plunger of the second drive solenoid 826 is pulled (the distal end portion of the plunger moves to the left as viewed from the rear surface side), the second movable arm 825 converts from the horizontal posture to the vertical posture. To do.

By the way, the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 are attached with an urging member 820b for assisting the rotational movement of the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825.
The biasing member 820b is, for example, a tension spring, and one end is fixed to the movable arm (first movable arm 821, second movable arm 825), and the other end is fixed to the movable base member 810. As a result, the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 are pulled in the direction in which the rotation free end portions rise upward, so that the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 change from the horizontal posture to the vertical posture. The conversion operation can be performed more smoothly.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 16, the position of the first movable arm 821 and the position of the second movable arm 825 are not shifted in the vertical direction, whereas the position of the first drive solenoid 822 and the second drive solenoid 826. The position is shifted in the vertical direction. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the second drive solenoid 826 is disposed below the first drive solenoid 822. The first solenoid link member 823 is connected to the distal end portion of the plunger of the first drive solenoid 822 at a position above the engagement pin 821b of the first movable arm 821 in the lateral orientation, and the second solenoid link member 827. Is connected to the distal end portion of the plunger of the second drive solenoid 826 at a position lower than the engagement pin 825b of the second movable arm 825 in the lateral orientation.

Thereby, the direction in which the first solenoid link member 823 applies a force to the first movable arm 821 (in the case of the present embodiment, an obliquely upward direction) and the direction in which the second solenoid link member 827 applies a force to the second movable arm 825. (In the case of this embodiment, obliquely downward), the magnitude of the initial torque applied to the movable arm is slightly different on the left and right, so the timing of the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 start to move. The timing is slightly off. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right solenoid arrangement positions are not shifted in the vertical direction, that is, the timing when the first movable arm 821 starts moving and the timing when the second movable arm 825 starts moving, The movement of the lower movable unit 830 becomes smooth. Therefore, since the solenoid torque (power) is not required as compared with the case where the left and right solenoids are not displaced in the vertical direction, small solenoids should be employed as the first drive solenoid 822 and the second drive solenoid 826. Is possible.
However, since the rotation axis of the first movable arm 821 and the rotation axis of the second movable arm 825 are not shifted in the vertical direction, the timing of the first movable arm 821 starting when the lower movable unit 830 starts moving. Even if the timing at which the second movable arm 825 starts moving slightly deviates, there is no adverse effect that the lower movable unit 830 tilts to the left and right.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 are converted from the horizontal posture to the vertical posture, the lower movable unit 830 is lifted upward and the left movable member 835. And the right movable member 836 is exposed. At this time, the left arm connecting pin 835a of the left movable member 835 inserted into the through hole 821c of the first movable arm 821 slides along the left pin insertion hole 831a of the movable lens member 831 and moves to the left pin insertion hole. The right arm connecting pin 836a of the right movable member 836 that is substantially in contact with the left end portion of the 831a and is inserted into the through hole 825c of the second movable arm 825 slides along the right pin insertion hole 831b of the movable lens member 831. And substantially abuts on the right end of the right pin insertion hole 831b.
Also, the left convex portion 835b of the left movable member 835 inserted into the through hole 833a of the left lateral slide guide member 833 slides along the left slide guide hole 831c of the movable lens member 831 and moves to the left slide guide hole 831c. The right convex portion 836b of the right movable member 836 inserted into the through hole 834a of the right lateral slide guide member 834 is slid along the right slide guide hole 831d of the movable lens member 831. It substantially abuts against the right end portion of the right slide guide hole 831d. Further, the guide receiving pin 831 e of the movable lens member 831 slides along the vertical movement guide hole 817 of the movable base member 810 and substantially contacts the upper end portion of the vertical movement guide hole 817.
At this time, not only the exposed light emitting portion 831i but also the shield light emitting portion 831h of the transmitted light emitting portion 831g of the movable lens member 831 is exposed. 831h can be seen as shining.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825 are converted from the horizontal posture to the vertical posture, the left lateral slide guide member 833 slides along the left slide guide hole 831c. At the same time, the right lateral slide guide member 834 slides along the right slide guide hole 831d. At this time, since the left lateral slide guide member 833 is fixed to the left movable member 835 at two points, the left end portion and the right end portion, through the left slide guide hole 831c, the left slide guide extending in the left-right direction. The sliding movement is performed while maintaining the state parallel to the hole 831c.
Similarly, the right lateral slide guide member 834 is fixed to the right movable member 836 at two points, the left end portion and the right end portion, via the right slide guide hole 831d, and therefore the right slide guide extending in the left-right direction. The sliding movement is performed while maintaining the state parallel to the hole 831d. Further, since the left slide guide hole 831c and the right slide guide hole 831d are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, the left side slide guide member 833 and the right side slide guide member 834 maintain a state aligned in the left-right direction. And slide it.

As a result, the left lateral slide guide member 833 and the right lateral slide guide member 834 can be synchronized, so that two solenoids (first drive solenoid 822, second drive solenoid 826) are used as in this embodiment. Even when the lower movable unit 830 is lifted, the lower movable unit 830 does not tilt left and right. The same applies when the lower movable unit 830 is lowered.
In addition, when the weight of the lower movable unit 830 acts on the rotation free end side of the first movable arm 821 and the second movable arm 825, the first movable arm 821 changes from the vertical posture to the horizontal posture. The plunger of the first drive solenoid 822 is pulled toward the initial position before excitation (the distal end of the plunger moves to the left as viewed from the rear side), and the second movable arm 825 moves sideways from the vertical posture. The plunger of the second drive solenoid 826 is pulled toward the initial value before excitation as the posture is changed (the tip of the plunger moves to the right as viewed from the rear side), and accordingly The lower movable unit 830 is lowered, and the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are returned to the shielding state.
In this embodiment, since the lower movable unit 830 is raised and lowered by the solenoid, the lower movable unit 830 is moved up and down faster than when the lower movable unit 830 is raised and lowered by the motor. Can do.

FIG. 19 shows a detailed structure of the side effect unit 900. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the side effect unit 900 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 19, the side effect unit 900 is mainly mounted on the rear surface of the effect base member 910 that is long in the vertical direction, and the effect base member 910 is irradiated with light from the rear. The lower light irradiation member 920 and the upper light irradiation member 930, and a side movable unit 940 that is disposed in front of the effect base member 910 and executes a predetermined movable effect is configured.
Here, the side effect unit 900 forms a movable effect unit that can be converted into a predetermined first state and a second state different from the first state.

In the effect base member 910, the lower part of the effect base member 910 constitutes a first mode object (first mode suggesting member) 911 for suggesting the first effect mode (first game mode), and the effect base. The upper part of the member 910 constitutes a second mode object (second mode suggesting member) 912 for suggesting the second effect mode (second game mode).
On the front side of the first mode object 911, a decoration portion for identifying the first effect mode is provided by uneven processing or the like. In addition, on the front side of the second mode object 912, a decorative portion for identifying the second effect mode is provided by uneven processing or the like.

That is, the first mode object 911 is a first object associated with the first game mode (first effect mode), and the second mode object 912 is associated with the second game mode (second effect mode). The formed second object is formed.
Of the effect base member 910, at least the first mode object 911 and the second mode object 912 can transmit light.
In addition, at the center in the vertical direction of the effect base member 910, the rotation for assisting the operation (specifically, the rotation operation) of the side movable unit 940 disposed in front of the effect base member 910. A guide portion 910a and a notch portion 910b for accommodating a part (specifically, gear portion 951a, etc.) of the side movable unit 940 disposed in front of the effect base member 910 are provided. ing.

The lower light irradiation member 920 is attached to the rear surface of the effect base member 910 so as to cover the first mode object 911 constituting the lower part of the effect base member 910 from behind.
The lower light irradiating member 920 mainly includes a lower reflective cover member 921 having a concave chamber shape in which a front surface at least having an inner surface covered with a reflective film (a reflective film formed by plating or vapor deposition) is opened, And a lower symbol LED substrate 922 that forms the lower wall portion of the reflect cover member 921.
LEDs are provided on the lower symbol LED substrate 922 (specifically, on the upper surface of the lower symbol LED substrate 922), and the lower light irradiation member 920 is connected to the LEDs of the lower symbol LED substrate 922. By reflecting the light on the inner surface of the lower reflect cover member 921, the entire rear surface of the first mode object 911 can be irradiated. As a result, the entire first mode object 911 can appear to shine.

The upper light irradiation member 930 is attached to the rear surface of the effect base member 910 so as to cover the second mode object 912 that forms the upper part of the effect base member 910 from behind.
The upper light irradiation member 930 is mainly composed of a concave upper reflective cover member 931 having an open front surface with at least an inner surface covered with a reflective film (a reflective film formed by plating or vapor deposition), and an upper reflect cover member. 931 and the upper symbol LED board 932 which makes the lower wall part of 931.
LEDs are provided on the upper symbol LED board 932 (specifically, on the upper surface of the upper symbol LED board 932), and the upper light irradiation member 930 reflects light from the LEDs of the upper symbol LED board 932 on the upper side. By reflecting on the inner surface of the cover member 931, the entire rear surface of the second mode object 912 can be irradiated with light. As a result, the entire second mode object 912 can be seen as if it is shining.

FIG. 20 shows a detailed structure of the side movable unit 940. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the side movable unit 940 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 20, the side movable unit 940 is mainly composed of a unit base member 950 and an LED substrate mounted on the rear surface of the unit base member 950 (specifically, the lens portion 952 of the unit base member 950). 941 and the unit base member 950 (specifically, the lens portion 952 of the unit base member 950) are arranged in front of the first mode object 911 and the second mode object 912 and can be hidden. The concealing movable part 942 capable of expanding and contracting operation and the unit base member 950 (specifically, the arm part 951 of the unit base member 950) are disposed in front of the concealing movable part 942 to expand (expand). A movable solenoid 943 capable of generating a driving force for operation and a unit base member 950 (specifically, Configured to include a solenoid link member 944 for connecting the arm portion 951) is disposed in front of the hidden movable portion 942 and the movable solenoid 943 of the unit base member 950, a.

The unit base member 950 includes an arm portion 951 and a substantially disk-shaped lens portion 952 attached to one end portion of the arm portion 951 in the longitudinal direction.
The lens portion 952 is made of a translucent material that can transmit light, and a lens cut for light diffusion is formed on the front surface of the lens portion 952.
The LED board 941 includes LEDs on the LED board 941 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 941), is attached to the rear surface of the lens unit 952, and receives light from the rear of the lens unit 952. It can be irradiated.

FIG. 21 shows the detailed structure of the concealment movable part 942. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the concealing movable portion 942 as viewed from the rear side.
As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the concealing movable part 942 mainly includes a link mechanism 960, a movable base lens 970 having a concave shape in the rear opening disposed in front of the link mechanism 960, and a movable base lens 970. And a movable decorative portion 980 having a concave shape in the shape of a rear opening.

The movable decorative portion 980 has a substantially circular dome shape when viewed from the front, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies 981 (in the case of the present embodiment, each division line is divided so as to pass through the center of the movable decorative portion 980). Eight movable decorative bodies divided into eight equal parts) are combined.
The movable decorative portion 980 is configured not to transmit light (or difficult to transmit light). Specifically, the movable decorative portion 980 can be formed of a material that does not transmit light (or is difficult to transmit light), or a light-transmitting material that can transmit light. It is also possible to form a half mirror by covering the surface with vapor deposition or the like.
The movable decorative portion 980 is configured so that the movable base lens 970 can be accommodated inside the movable decorative portion 980.

The movable base lens 970 has a substantially circular dome shape when viewed from the front, and is formed of a translucent material that can transmit light.
The movable base lens 970 is configured such that the opening of the movable base lens 970 can be closed by the lens portion 952 from the rear of the movable base lens 970 in a state where the link mechanism 960 is housed in the movable base lens 970. ing.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, a plurality of screw holes 952a (four in the case of the present embodiment) penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the peripheral end portion of the lens portion 952. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, a plurality of cylindrical mounting bosses 970a along the front-rear direction are provided in a portion corresponding to the screw holes 952a of the lens portion 952 in the movable base lens 970 (in the case of this embodiment, 4) are provided. That is, in the movable base lens 970, with the opening of the movable base lens 970 closed by the lens portion 952, a screw (not shown) is attached to the mounting boss 970a from the rear of the lens portion 952 through the screw hole 952a of the lens portion 952. By being inserted into the lens unit 952, the lens unit 952 can be fixed.

  Each movable decorative body 981 of the movable decorative portion 980 is slidable relative to the movable base lens 970 in the radial direction of the movable base lens 970 (that is, the radial direction of the movable decorative portion 980). That is, each movable decorative body 981 of the movable decorative portion 980 can be converted from a shielding state in which the movable base lens 970 is exposed by moving in a direction in which a gap is formed between them to shield the movable base lens 970. It has become. Thus, the concealing movable part 942 (specifically, the movable decorative part 980) is expanded in diameter (expanded / contracted) by converting between the shielded state and the exposed state.

  Specifically, a link (engagement) protruding toward the rear side (movable base lens 970 side) on the inner side of the inner surface of the movable decorative body 981 (center side of the movable decorative portion 980) from the radial center. A pin 981a is provided. On the other hand, an elongated hole that is long in the radial direction of the movable base lens 970 is provided at a substantially central portion in the radial direction of the movable base lens 970 as a pin guide portion 970b through which the link pin 981a can be slidably inserted. The same number as the number of the bodies 981 (8 in the case of this embodiment) is provided. That is, the movable decorative body 981 is configured so that the link pin 981a can slide and move in the radial direction of the movable base lens 970 with respect to the movable base lens 970 by sliding along the pin guide portion 970b of the movable base lens 970. Has been.

Here, as shown in FIG. 20, the sliding movement of the movable decorative body 981 is assisted on the outer surface of the movable base lens 970 outside the pin guide portion 970b (on the side opposite to the center of the movable base lens 970). The same number of slide guide grooves 970c as the number of movable decorative bodies 981 (eight in the case of this embodiment) are provided along the radial direction of the movable base lens 970.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, the inner surface of the movable decorative body 981 can be slidably engaged with the slide guide groove 970c (specifically, can be inserted into the slide guide groove 970c) at the substantially central portion in the radial direction. ) Slide ribs 981b are projected along the radial direction of the movable decorative portion 980. In other words, the slide guide groove 970c is configured to assist the sliding movement of the movable decorative body 981 in the radial direction by the sliding rib 981b of each movable decorative body 981 sliding along the slide guide groove 970c. Yes.

Further, a position restricting rib 981c for restricting the position of the movable decorative body 981 with respect to the movable base lens 970 is projected from the peripheral end portion of the inner surface of the movable decorative body 981. In the case of the present embodiment, the position regulating rib 981c is provided on the movable decorative body 981 other than the movable decorative body 981 having the notch 981d provided in the portion facing the arm portion 951 among the plurality of movable decorative bodies 981. ing.
On the other hand, the peripheral end portion of the movable base lens 970 is provided with the same number of notches 970d into which the position restricting ribs 981c can be inserted from the side as many as the number of position restricting ribs 981c (seven in this embodiment). ing. That is, the position regulating rib 981c is configured to be able to regulate the position of the movable decorative body 981 with respect to the movable base lens 970 by being accommodated in the cutout portion 970d of the movable base lens 970 when the movable decorative body 981 is in the shielded state. Yes.

The link mechanism 960 is a mechanism for sliding and moving each movable decorative body 981 in the radial direction of the movable base lens 970, that is, a mechanism for expanding the diameter of the movable decorative portion 980.
Specifically, the link mechanism 960 includes one main link member 961, n−1 (n = the number of movable decorative bodies 981, n = 8 in this embodiment), One link rotating plate 963 and one rotating plate urging member 960a are configured. The link mechanism 960 is configured to be housed inside the movable base lens 970. The movable base lens 970 opens the movable base lens 970 through the lens portion 952 in a state where the link mechanism 960 is housed inside. It is possible to close with.

The link rotating plate 963 has a substantially disk shape that can rotate with respect to the movable base lens 970, and is formed of a translucent material that can transmit light.
Specifically, a bearing portion 963 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at the center of the link rotating plate 963. On the other hand, a rotary plate rotation shaft 970e whose front end portion can be inserted into the bearing portion 963a is projected from the inner surface of the movable base lens 970 toward the rear side. That is, the link rotating plate 963 is rotatably mounted on the rotating plate rotating shaft 970e protruding inside the movable base lens 970 via the bearing portion 963a, thereby rotating around the rotating plate rotating shaft 970e. It is configured to be able to.
In addition, a cutout lined in the circumferential direction of the link rotation plate 963 is provided at the peripheral end portion of the link rotation plate 963 as an individual link portion 963b for engaging with the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962. The same number as the number of link members 961 and sub-link members 962) (eight in the case of this embodiment) is provided.

The main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 are formed of a light transmissive material that can transmit light.
The sub-link member 962 has a trifurcated shape, and one end portion side is a shaft-attached end portion, and the remaining two other end portions are rotation-free end portions.
The main link member 961 has a shape in which a protrusion is provided between a shaft-attached end portion and one rotation free end portion (a rotation free end portion provided with a link portion 962c (described later)) in the sub link member 962. I am doing. That is, the main link member 961 has one end portion that is a shaft-attached end portion, and the other two other end portions are rotation-free end portions that protrude between the shaft-attached end portion and one rotation-free end portion. Has a part. A link receiving hole 961d that can be engaged with an engaging pin 944a (see FIG. 20) projecting from the tip of the solenoid link member 944 (specifically, the engaging pin 944a can be inserted) is provided in the protrusion. Is provided. That is, the main link member 961 is configured to be connected to the plunger of the movable solenoid 943 via the solenoid link member 944 by engaging the link receiving hole 961d with the engagement pin 944a of the solenoid link member 944. .
The main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction of the link rotating plate 963 with the shaft-attached end portion facing outward.

The main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 are rotatable with respect to the movable base lens 970.
Specifically, bearing portions 961a and 962a penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided at the shaft-attached end portions of the main link member 961 and the sub-link member 962. On the other hand, on the outer side of the inner surface of the movable base lens 970 than the pin guide portion 970b (on the side opposite to the center of the movable base lens 970), a link rotation shaft 970f whose tip can be inserted into the bearing portions 961a and 962a is provided. As many as the number of link members (main link member 961 and sub link member 962) (eight in this embodiment) are provided in the circumferential direction of the movable base lens 970. That is, the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 are pivotally attached to the link rotation shaft 970f protruding from the movable base lens 970 via the bearing portions 961a and 962a, thereby rotating the link. It is configured to be able to rotate around the shaft 970f.

In addition, the other rotation free ends of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 can be engaged with the individual link portion 963b of the link rotating plate 963 (specifically, the individual link portion 963b can be inserted). Link (engagement) pins 961b and 962b are projected toward the front side (link rotating plate 963 side).
The main link member 961 rotates with respect to the movable base lens 970 with the link rotation shaft 970f as an axis in conjunction with the linear movement of the plunger of the movable solenoid 943 connected to the main link member 961 via the solenoid link member 944. Configured to work.

The link rotating plate 963 is linked to the rotating operation of the main link member 961 engaged with the link rotating plate 963 by the individual link portion 963b and the link pin 961b, and the movable base lens with the rotating plate rotating shaft 970e as an axis. It is configured to rotate (rotate) with respect to 970.
Further, each sub-link member 962 pivots on the link rotation shaft 970f in conjunction with the rotation operation (rotation operation) of the link rotation plate 963 engaged with the sub-link member 962 by the link pin 962b and the individual link portion 963b. And is configured to rotate with respect to the movable base lens 970.
That is, the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 are configured to rotate with respect to the movable base lens 970 about the link rotation shaft 970f as a link in conjunction with the linear movement of the plunger of the movable solenoid 943.

  In addition, at one rotation free end portion of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962, long hole-like link portions 961c and 962c penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. The link portions 961c and 962c can be slidably engaged with the distal end portion of the link pin 981a of the movable decorative body 981 (specifically, the distal end portion of the link pin 981a can be inserted). That is, each movable decorative body 981 has the link pin 981a inserted into the pin guide portion 970b of the movable base lens 970, and the distal end portion of the link pin 981a is connected to the link portion 961c of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962. By being inserted into 962c, it is configured so that it can be connected to the free rotation ends of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962.

  When the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 rotate about the link rotation shaft 970f, the trajectories of the link portions 961c and 962c are arcuate, but the link pin 981a is connected to the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962. The link pin 981a is slidably inserted into the link portions 961c and 962c of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962, and the link pin 981a is formed with a diameter of the movable base lens 970. Since each of the movable decorative bodies 981 is inserted into a long hole (pin guide portion 970 b) that is long in the direction, the movable decorative body 981 is attached to the movable base lens 970 in conjunction with the rotation operation of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962. On the other hand, the movable base lens 970 slides in the radial direction.

As described above, since the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 rotate in conjunction with the linear motion of the plunger of the movable solenoid 943, each movable decorative body 981 is subjected to the linear motion of the plunger of the movable solenoid 943. In conjunction with this, the movable base lens 970 slides in the radial direction of the movable base lens 970.
The sliding movement of each movable decorative body 981 in the radial direction is assisted by the slide guide groove 970c provided in the movable base lens 970. Can be slid in the direction. Note that a motor may be used as a drive source instead of the movable solenoid 943.

Here, with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23, the diameter expansion (expansion / contraction) operation | movement of the concealment movable part 942 is demonstrated.
22 is a rear view of the main part of the side movable unit 940 when the movable decorative body 981 is in a shielded state, and FIG. 23 is a side movable unit when the movable decorative body 981 is in an exposed state. It is a rear view of the principal part of 940.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the projection of the main link member 961 (the portion where the link receiving hole 961 d is provided) is pushed toward the center of the movable base lens 970 by the movable solenoid 943, the movable decorative body 981 is in a shielding state. At this time, the link pin 981a of each movable decorative body 981 inserted into the link portions 961c and 962c of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 is one end in the longitudinal direction of the pin guide portion 970b of the movable base lens 970 (movable The base lens 970 is substantially in contact with the central end portion of the base lens 970.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23, when the plunger of the movable solenoid 943 is drawn (the distal end portion of the plunger moves away from the center of the movable base lens 970), the main link member 961 becomes the link rotation shaft. It rotates with respect to the movable base lens 970 around 970f.
When the main link member 961 rotates, the link pin 961b of the main link member 961 presses the individual link portion 963b of the link rotation plate 963 engaged with the link pin 961b, so that the link rotation plate 963 has the rotation plate rotation shaft. It rotates in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, clockwise when viewed from the rear side) with respect to the movable base lens 970 with the axis 970e as an axis.
When the link rotating plate 963 rotates, the other individual link portion 963b of the link rotating plate 963 presses the link pin 962b of the sub link member 962 engaged with the individual link portion 963b, so that each sub link member 962 It rotates with respect to the movable base lens 970 around the link rotation shaft 970f.

  When the main link member 961 rotates, the link portion 961c of the main link member 961 presses the link pin 981a of the movable decorative body 981 inserted into the link portion 961c, and when the sub link member 962 rotates, Since the link portion 962c of the link member 962 presses the link pin 981a of the movable decorative body 981 inserted into the link portion 962c, each movable decorative body 981 has a diameter of the movable base lens 970 with respect to the movable base lens 970. Slide in the direction. As a result, the movable decorative body 981 is exposed, and the concealing movable portion 942 is expanded in diameter. At this time, the link pin 981a of each movable decorative body 981 inserted into the link portions 961c and 962c of the main link member 961 and the sub link member 962 slides along the pin guide portion 970b of the movable base lens 970. The pin guide part 970b is substantially in contact with the other end part in the longitudinal direction.

Since the movable decorative portion 980 does not transmit light (or does not easily transmit light), when the LED of the LED board 941 is lit when the movable decorative body 981 is in an exposed state (or the LED board 941 When the movable decorative body 981 is exposed when the LED is lit), only the gaps formed between the movable decorative bodies 981 shine, and it may appear as if light is emitted from the gaps. it can.
Then, the plunger of the movable solenoid 943 is pushed in (the distal end of the plunger moves toward the center of the movable base lens 970), whereby the movable decorative body 981 returns to the shielding state.

By the way, the rotation plate urging member 960a for returning the link rotation plate 963 to the initial state is attached to the link rotation plate 963.
The rotating plate urging member 960a urges, for example, the link rotating plate 963 in the rotation direction (in the case of the present embodiment, counterclockwise as viewed from the rear surface side) to return the movable decorative body 981 from the exposed state to the shielded state. And a biasing member having one end fixed to a biasing member receiving piece 963c (see FIG. 20) projecting from the front surface of the link rotating plate 963 and the other end projecting from the inner surface of the movable base lens 970. It is fixed to a mounting boss 970g (see FIG. 21). As a result, the link rotating plate 963 is biased in the rotational direction for returning the movable decorative body 981 from the exposed state to the shielded state, so that when the movable decorative body 981 is returned from the exposed state to the shielded state, it is electrically connected. It does not require power.

FIG. 24 shows the detailed structure of the side effect unit driving unit 740 attached to the right front portion of the effect base member 721. FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the right front part of the effect base member 721 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 24, the effect base member 721 has a side effect unit drive unit for rotating the side movable unit 940 with respect to the effect base member 721 at the front right portion of the effect base member 721. 740.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the side effect unit driving unit 740 is mainly mounted on the front surface of the effect base member 721 and can generate a driving force for rotating the side movable unit 940. A unit motor 741, a drive gear 742 disposed in front of the movable effect unit motor 741 and fixed to the shaft (rotary shaft) of the movable effect unit motor 741, and a movable effect among the front surfaces of the effect base member 721 A movable effect unit rotation shaft 743 protruding toward the front side at a position below the position where the unit motor 741 is disposed, and a movable effect unit rotation shaft 743 protruding from the front surface of the effect base member 721. A spring mounting portion 744 disposed at a position lower than the position, and a position below the projecting position of the movable effect unit rotation shaft 743 in the front surface of the effect base member 721. Configured with the state detecting unit 750 for detecting the state of the arranged by the side effect unit 900 in position.

The side movable unit 940 is rotatable with respect to the effect base member 721.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the other end in the longitudinal direction (the end to which the lens portion 952 is attached) of the rear surface of the arm portion 951 of the unit base member 950 of the side movable unit 940. A gear portion 951a that can mesh with the drive gear 742 of the side effect unit drive unit 740 is provided at the opposite end). The gear portion 951a cannot rotate with respect to the arm portion 951, and is configured to rotate integrally with the arm portion 951.
In addition, a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at the center of the gear portion 951a of the arm portion 951 as a bearing portion 951b through which the movable effect unit rotation shaft 743 of the side effect unit drive unit 740 can be inserted. .

The side movable unit 940 is pivotally attached to the movable effect unit rotating shaft 743 projecting from the front surface of the effect base member 721 via the bearing portion 951b so that the movable effect unit rotating shaft 743 can be rotated. It is comprised so that it can rotate around. Accordingly, the side effect unit 900 uses the concealment movable unit 942 of the side part movable unit 940 to conceal the second mode object 912 (see FIG. 2) and the second state of concealing the first mode object 911. The state can be converted into a state (for example, see FIG. 27).
In the state where the side movable unit 940 is pivotally attached to the movable effect unit rotation shaft 743, the gear portion 951a of the side movable unit 940 meshes with the drive gear 742 provided on the effect base member 721 side. It is configured as follows.

That is, the side effect unit 900 is a movable effect unit that can be converted into a predetermined first state and a second state different from the first state, and the movable effect unit (side effect unit 900) is the first In the state, the second object (second mode object 912) is concealed (shielded), while in the second state, the first object (first mode object 911) is concealed (shielded).
Specifically, the movable effect unit (side effect unit 900) is an effect unit drive source (movable effect unit motor 741) capable of generating a driving force for converting the state of the movable effect unit. And an arm portion 951 capable of swinging in the vertical direction by receiving the driving force of the effect unit drive source (movable effect unit motor 741), and the movable end (rotation free end) side of the arm portion 951. A concealment (shielding) part (concealment movable part 942) that is provided and can conceal (shield) the first object (first mode object 911) or the second object (second mode object 912). Yes.

  The concealing part (the concealing movable part 942) includes a translucent movable base member (movable base lens 970) having a translucency attached to a movable end (rotation free end) part of the arm part 951, and A base light emitting unit (LED substrate 941 (specifically, LED of the LED substrate 941) disposed on the rear surface side of the movable base member (movable base lens 970) and capable of irradiating light toward the movable base member. )), A plurality of movable decorative bodies 981 arranged side by side in the circumferential direction of the front surface so as to cover the front surface of the movable base member (movable base lens 970), and a drive for moving the plurality of movable decorative bodies 981 A decorative body drive source (movable solenoid 943) capable of generating a force, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies 981 in response to a driving force from the decorative body drive source are moved to a movable base member (movable base member). Link mechanism 960 for moving in the radial direction from the center of the plurality of movable decorative bodies 981 through a gap formed between the plurality of movable decorative bodies 981 in accordance with the moving operation of the movable decorative bodies 981. The light transmitted through the movable base member (movable base lens 970) is configured to be visible.

Note that the shape of the concealment movable portion 942 is not limited to a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Further, the moving direction of each movable decorative body 981 is not limited to the radial direction of the movable base lens 970, and can be arbitrarily changed as long as the movable decorative body 981 moves in a direction in which a gap is formed between the plurality of movable decorative bodies 981. is there.

Here, the arm portion 951 includes a spring receiving piece 951c protruding from the rear surface of the gear portion 951a. An urging member 940a (see FIG. 19) for assisting the rotation operation of the side movable unit 940 is attached to the spring receiving piece 951c.
The biasing member 940a is, for example, a tension spring, and one end is fixed to the spring receiving piece 951c, and the other end is fixed to the spring mounting portion 744 provided on the effect base member 721. As a result, the side of the movable movable unit 940 is pulled in the direction in which the rotation free end side (the concealed movable unit 942 side) rises upward, and therefore the load applied to the movable effect unit motor 741 by the weight of the side movable unit 940 is increased. It is possible to reduce and to perform the conversion operation from the second state to the first state of the side effect unit 900 more smoothly.

The state detection unit 750 can detect whether the side effect unit 900 is in the first state, the second state, or another state (a third state (described later) or the like). ing.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, the state detection unit 750 mainly includes a light shielding plate member 751, a left photo interrupter (sensor) 752, and a right photo interrupter (sensor) 753. The
The light shielding plate member 751 has a bearing portion 751a formed of a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end portion, and can be inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the left photointerrupter 752 or the right photointerrupter 753 at the other end portion. A light shielding plate 751b is provided. Further, one end portion of the light shielding plate member 751 is provided with a pressure receiving portion 751c that protrudes in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction.

The light shielding plate member 751 is rotatable with respect to the effect base member 721.
Specifically, a shading plate rotation shaft portion 721b that can be inserted into the bearing portion 751a is located on the front side of the front surface of the effect base member 721 at a position below the projecting position of the movable effect unit rotation shaft 743. Projected toward. That is, the light-shielding plate member 751 is pivotally attached to the light-shielding plate rotation shaft portion 721b protruding from the front surface of the effect base member 721 via the bearing portion 751a, so that the light-shielding plate rotation shaft portion. It is configured to be able to rotate around 721b.

Here, with reference to FIG.25 and FIG.26, the detection of the state of the side part production unit 900 by the state detection part 750 is demonstrated.
25 is a rear view of the side movable unit 940, the side effect unit driving unit 740, and the state detecting unit 750 when the side effect unit 900 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 is a side effect. It is a rear view of the side part movable unit 940, the side part production unit drive part 740, and the state detection part 750 in case the unit 900 is a 2nd state.

The light shielding plate member 751 sets the weight of the light shielding plate 751b to be larger than the weight of the pressure receiving portion 751c, so that the light shielding plate 751b is disposed below the bearing portion 751a, and the pressure receiving portion 751c is less than the bearing portion 751a. Is also attached to the light-shielding plate rotation shaft portion 721b in a state of being disposed on the upper side.
The arm portion 951 of the unit base member 950 of the side movable unit 940 includes a first pressing portion 951d and a second pressing portion 951e that protrude from the rear surface of the gear portion 951a. The first pressing portion 951d moves the pressing receiving portion 751c of the rear surface of the gear portion 951a in a predetermined direction (when viewed from the rear surface side in the case of the present embodiment) when the side effect unit 900 is in the first state. Direction). In addition, the second pressing portion 951e has the pressing receiving portion 751c on the rear surface of the gear portion 951a when the side effect unit 900 is in the second state (see the rear surface side in the case of this embodiment). It is provided at a position where it can be pressed in the counterclockwise direction.

As shown in FIG. 25, the side effect unit 900 is in the first state, and the first pressing portion 951d moves the pressing receiving portion 751c in a predetermined direction (in the case of this embodiment, the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear side). When pressed, the light shielding plate member 751 rotates in the predetermined direction. Accordingly, the light shielding plate 751b is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the left photo interrupter 752, and is detected by the left photo interrupter 752.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26, the side effect unit 900 is in the second state, and the second pressing portion 951e moves the pressing receiving portion 751c in a predetermined direction (in the case of this embodiment, the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear side). ), The light shielding plate member 751 rotates in the predetermined direction. Thereby, the light shielding plate 751b is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the right photo interrupter 753 and detected by the right photo interrupter 753.

  Further, the side effect unit 900 is in the third state in which the first mode object 911 and the second mode object 912 are not concealed by the concealment movable unit 942, and the pressing of the press receiving unit 751c by the first pressing unit 951d is also the second pressing unit 951e. When the pressing of the pressing receiving portion 751c is released, the light shielding plate member 751 is in a state in which the light shielding plate 751b is disposed between the left photo interrupter 752 and the right photo interrupter 753. Thus, the light shielding plate 751b is not inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the left photo interrupter 752 or between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the right photo interrupter 753, and the right photo interrupter 752 is also inserted into the right photo interrupter. It will not be detected by the interrupter 753 either.

That is, the state detection unit 750 determines whether the light shielding plate 751b of the light shielding plate member 751 has been detected by the left photointerrupter 752, the right photointerrupter 753, or neither, has detected the side effect unit. 900 states can be detected.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the first pressing portion 951d and the second pressing portion 951e are integrally connected by a connecting portion 951f. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first pressing portion 951d and the second pressing portion 951e may be separate bodies.
Moreover, the structure of the state detection part 750 is not restricted to the thing of this embodiment, If it can detect the state of the side part production | generation unit 900, it can change arbitrarily arbitrarily.

FIG. 27 shows a detailed structure of the surrounding frame body 40. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the surrounding frame body 40 as viewed from the front side.
As described above, the surrounding frame body 40 (specifically, the back surface component member 700) includes two units, ie, the lower movable unit 830 and the side movable unit 940, as units for executing a predetermined movable effect. Yes.
As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, the lower movable unit 830 and the side movable unit 940 partially overlap with each other when viewed from the front side, but the position of the lower movable unit 830 and the side movable unit 940 Since the position is shifted in the front-rear direction, the operations of each other are not hindered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, since the light emitting effect device 610 is disposed in front of the arm portion 951 of the side movable unit 940, it is difficult to visually recognize the arm portion 951 from the front of the gaming machine 10. ing.
That is, the mode display unit (light emission effect device 610) is arranged in front of the swing path of the arm unit 951 and is configured to restrict the visibility of the swing operation of the arm unit 951.
As shown in FIG. 27, the lower movable unit 830 is disposed behind the stage 601.

The stage 601 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the stage 601 (at least the periphery of the guide outlet 603b of the front surface of the stage 601) does not transmit light (or It is covered with a decorative member 601a which is difficult to transmit light. The partition member 602 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light.
Therefore, even if the movable lens member 831 is disposed at the lowered position (initial position) and the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in the shielding state, the movable lens member 831 is movable from the gap between the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836. Since the exposed light emitting portion 831i of the lens member 831 is exposed, the inside of the guide channel 603 can be illuminated by light transmitted through the rear wall portion 602b of the partition member 602 and the rear surface portion of the stage 601.
That is, the movable unit (lower movable unit 830) is arranged behind the stage 601 so that the exposed light emitting portion 831i is located behind the guiding flow path 603, and the guiding flow path 603 includes the exposed light emitting section 831i. At least the back side wall (the back wall portion 602b of the partition member 602 and the rear surface portion of the stage 601) is made of a translucent material so that the inside is irradiated with the light that has passed through.

  Here, the gaming machine 10 is a gaming member (enclosure frame) disposed on a gaming board 30 (specifically, a gaming board 30 main body composed of a wooden plywood board, an acrylic board, etc.) in which a gaming area 32 is formed. And a control device (game control device 100) for controlling the game is disposed on the rear side of the game board 30. The game members (the surrounding frame body 40 and the prize opening device (the first special variation prize-winning device 38, etc.)) are attached to the game board 30 so as to close the opening formed in the game board 30.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 4, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is directly attached to a gaming member such as the surrounding frame body 40, a prize opening device (the first special variable prize-winning device 38 or the like), and the gaming board 30. The decorative member or the like is provided with a plurality of linear light emitting portions 500. Then, by performing line display on the display device 41 so as to have continuity with the linear light emitting unit 500, an effect (line effect) in which the linear light emitting unit 500 and the display device 41 are associated can be executed. It has become.
Since the configuration of each linear light emitting unit 500 is substantially the same, the configuration of the linear light emitting unit 500 included in the first special variation winning device 38 will be described later, and the description of the configuration of the other linear light emitting units 500 will be omitted. To do.

Next, details of the display unit partition effect unit 440 will be described.
FIG. 28 shows a perspective view of frame effect device 430 in a state where lower effect unit 800 and side effect unit 900 are removed.
As shown in FIG. 28, in the frame effect production device 430, the ball passage member 723 is arranged in the vertical direction outside the partition wall 434a on the left side of the mounting base member 434, and the side effect unit 900 on the right side. An effect unit motor 741 that constitutes a side effect unit driving unit 740 for driving is provided. A shaft 743 provided in the effect unit motor 741 is a support shaft serving as a rotation center of the side effect unit 900.
Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B described above are disposed so as to be displaced forward and backward, and the first movable partition member 48A is located in front of the second movable partition member 48B. The second movable partition member 48B is configured to be movable in the left-right direction behind the first movable partition member 48A, that is, to pass each other. An intermediate member 435 that functions as a spacer is provided between the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B.

A first motor 441A for moving the first movable partition member 48A and a second motor 441B for moving the second movable partition member 48B are provided on the upper surface of the display section partition effect unit 440. ing. As will be described in detail later, the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are suspended so as to be movable by a slide shaft disposed in the horizontal direction, and the driving force of the first motor 441A and the second motor 441B is as follows. Each belt is configured to be transmitted to the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B by a belt.
FIG. 29 shows a state where the ball passage member 723 and the lower cover member 433 are removed from the frame body effect device 430 shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 29, the lower end of the first movable partition member 48A is along the front surface of the middle member 435 below the mounting base member 434, and the lower end of the second movable partition member 48B is along the back surface of the middle member 435. Arranged to move.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, a boss portion 434b for fixing the ball passage member 723 is provided at a position to be a back portion of the ball passage member 723 on the left side of the front surface of the mounting base member 434. . Further, a boss portion 435b for fixing the lower cover member 433 in parallel with an appropriate interval is provided on the front surface of the middle member 435 below the mounting base member 434, and the lower cover member is connected to the middle member 435. The lower end portion of the first movable partition member 48 </ b> A is movable in the gap with 433.
Further, the lower surface of the mounting base member 434 supplies power to the LED lamps drawn from the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B and provided on the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B. The accessory relay board 436 to which the wiring for connecting is connected is attached.

Further, a first partition member right position detection unit 437A for detecting that the first movable partition member 48A is moved to the rightmost side is provided at the front right end portion of the middle member 435. On the other hand, a first partition member left position detection unit 438A for detecting that the first movable partition member 48A is moved to the leftmost side is provided at the front left end portion of the middle member 435.
FIG. 30 shows a detailed structure of the first partition member right position detection unit 437A. As shown in FIG. 30, a lower horizontal support portion 481 extending in the left-right direction is fixed to the lower end of the first movable partition member 48A, and the first partition member is attached to the right end of the lower horizontal support portion 481. A right position detection piece 481a is provided. A first partition member left position detection piece 481b is provided at the front left end portion of the lower horizontal support portion 481. On the other hand, a U-shaped transmissive photoelectric sensor 438A that sandwiches the first partition member right position detecting piece 481a from the front and the rear is provided at the right end of the front surface of the middle member 435.

  FIG. 31 shows a state in which the middle member 435 and the first movable partition member 48A are removed from the frame body effect device 430 shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 31, a boss portion 434 c for fixing the middle member 435 is provided on the lower front surface of the mounting base member 434. Further, a second partition member right position detector 438B for detecting that the second movable partition member 48B is moved to the rightmost side is provided on the lower right side of the front surface of the attachment base member 434. On the other hand, a second partition member left position detection unit 437B for detecting that the second movable partition member 48B is moved to the rightmost side is provided on the lower left side of the front surface of the mounting base member 434.

FIG. 32 shows a detailed structure of the second partition member right position detection unit 437B.
As shown in FIG. 32, a lower horizontal support portion 482 extending in the left-right direction is fixed to the lower end of the second movable partition member 48B, and a second partition member is attached to the left end of the lower horizontal support portion 482. A left position detection piece 482a is provided. Further, a second partition member right position detection piece 482b is provided at the right front end portion of the front surface of the lower horizontal support portion 482. On the other hand, a U-shaped transmission type photoelectric sensor 439B that sandwiches the second partition member left position detection piece 482a from the front and the rear is provided on the left side of the lower surface of the mounting base member 434.
The detection signals of the sensors of the detection units are input to a control device (production control board) on the back of the gaming machine.

FIG. 33 shows a front view of the frame effect device 430 shown in FIG. 28 as viewed from the front.
As shown in FIG. 33, the first movable partition member 48A is suspended so as to be movable in the left-right direction by a first slide shaft 442A disposed in the horizontal direction above the unit. Further, as described above, the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are arranged so as to be displaced forward and backward, and are at the same height position as the first slide shaft 442A and behind the first slide shaft 442A, A second slide shaft 442B (not visible in FIG. 33) is provided to suspend the second movable partition member 48B so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

A first slider 483A and a second slider having through holes that can be inserted through the first slide shaft 442A and the second slide shaft 442B, respectively, at the upper ends of the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B. Sliders 483B are provided.
Also, above the first slide shaft 442A and the second slide shaft 442B, there are a first belt 443A and a second belt 443B for moving the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B in the left-right direction, respectively. A first motor 441A for moving the first belt 443A and a second motor 441B for moving the second belt 443B are arranged in the horizontal direction on the upper plate 444 of the display unit partition effect unit 440. Is provided. Note that the first belt 443A and the second belt 443B are arranged in a vertically shifted state in order to prevent interference with each other.

FIG. 34 shows a state where the upper plate 444 of the display unit partition effect unit 440 is removed from the frame effect device 430 shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 34, the right shaft support member 445A fixed to the upper right side portion of the mounting base member 434 and the left shaft support member 445B fixed to the upper left side portion of the mounting base member 434 have the above-mentioned The first slide shaft 442A and the second slide shaft 442B are supported in parallel with each other in a horizontal state.
Further, a first pulley 446A around which the first belt 443A is wound is formed on the upper surface of the first slider 483A, and a second pulley 446B around which the second belt 443B is wound on the upper surface of the second slider 483B. Each is mounted for rotation. On the other hand, a first buffer pulley 447A around which the first belt 443A is wound is mounted on the upper left side of the mounting base member 434 above the left shaft supporting member 445B and mounted above the right shaft supporting member 445A. A second buffer pulley 447B around which the second belt 443B is wound is rotatably attached to the upper right portion of the base member 434.

The rotational force of the first motor 441A is transmitted to the first pulley 446A via a pair of gears 448A, and the pulley drives the first belt 443A to move the first slider 483A. Further, the rotational force of the second motor 441B is transmitted to the second pulley 446B via a pair of gears 448B, and the pulley drives the second belt 443B to move the second slider 483B.
FIG. 35 shows a state in which display unit partition effect unit 440 shown in FIG. 34 is viewed from above. As can be seen from FIG. 35, the first buffer pulley 447A is rotatably supported by a pulley support arm 449A incorporating a compression spring. Although not shown, the first buffer pulley 447A is opposite to the pulley support arm 449A (the right end in FIG. 35). The fixed portion 449 a is fixed to the mounting base member 434. Similarly, the second buffer pulley 447B is rotatably supported by a pulley support arm 449B incorporating a compression spring. Although not shown, the second buffer pulley 447B is fixed on the opposite side (the left end in FIG. 35) of the pulley support arm 449B. The portion 449b is fixed to the mounting base member 434.

  FIG. 36 shows the second movable partition member 48B from which the first movable partition member 48A and the first slide shaft 442A, the first motor 441A, the first belt 443A, and the first pulley 446A are removed from the display section partition effect unit 440. A perspective view of the drive mechanism is shown, and FIG. 37 is a front view of the drive mechanism of the second movable partition member 48B of FIG. 36 as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 38 shows a plan view of the drive mechanism of the second movable partition member 48B shown in FIG. 37 as viewed from above.

FIG. 39 shows an enlarged perspective view of the second movable partition member 48B.
As can be seen from FIG. 39, the second movable partition member 48B has a shape in which the center swells inward as a whole, and a second slider having a shaft communication hole 483b that can be inserted into the second slide shaft 442B at the upper end. 483B is provided. A belt clamping portion 483C and a lid member 484 are provided at the inner end portion (right end in FIG. 39) of the second slider 483B so as to protrude upward and clamp the second belt 443B from the front and rear. . Further, the lower horizontal support portion 482 is fixed to the lower end of the second movable partition member 48B, and the second partition member left position detection piece 482a is provided at the left end of the lower horizontal support portion 482, and the lower horizontal support portion A second partition member right position detection piece 482b is provided at the right front end portion of the front surface of 482.

FIG. 40 shows a perspective view of the second movable partition member 48B of FIG. 39 in an exploded state.
As shown in FIG. 40, the second movable partition member 48B includes a lid member 484 joined to the back surface of the second slider 483B of the second movable partition member 48B, and a plurality of light emitting diodes LED mounted on the front surface. And an LED substrate 486 mounted on the back side of the main body, and a position detection member 487 that includes position detection pieces 482a and 482b and is engaged with the lower horizontal support part 482 at the lower end. The first movable partition member 48A is different from the second movable partition member 48B in that the first movable partition member 48A has a symmetrical shape and has the same structure. Therefore, the description of the structure of the first movable partition member 48A is omitted.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view showing a state in which the second slider 483B at the upper end of the second movable partition member 48B is disassembled.
The second slider 483B is formed so that the back surface is open and the inside is hollow. As shown in FIG. 41, the second slider 483B is formed between the second slider 483B and the lid member 484 joined to the back surface. Two sets of rollers 841a and 841b; 841c and 841d that are in contact with the second slide shaft 442B from above and below, and two sets of roller shafts 842a that rotatably support these rollers, respectively. 842b; 842c, 842d, and guide shafts 843a, 843b; 843c, 843d that come into contact with the second slide shaft 442B so as to be sandwiched from the front and rear are accommodated.

The inner surface (front surface in FIG. 41) of the lid member 484A is engaged with the end portions of the roller shafts 842a, 842b; Is formed. Further, on the inner surface (front surface in FIG. 41) of the lid member 484, two sets of shaft joining pieces 845a and 845b; Is formed.
FIG. 42 shows the rollers 841a, 841b; 841c, 841d and the roller shafts 842a, 842b; 842c, 842d, the shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d and the relationship between the second slide shaft 442B are shown.

As shown in FIG. 42, the two sets of rollers 841a and 841b; 841c and 841d are engaged with the two sets of roller shafts 842a and 842b; 842c and 842d, and sandwich the second slide shaft 442B from above and below. Touching.
The second slide shaft 442B is inserted through the two sets of shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d, and the guide shafts 843a, 843c are brought into contact with the front end surfaces of the shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d. Are arranged in a vertical posture, and the guide shafts 843b and 843d are arranged in a vertical posture so as to come into contact with the inner side surfaces of the shaft joint pieces 845a and 845b; 845c and 845d, and sandwiched between the second slide shaft 442B from the front and rear. It has become.
By providing the structure as described above, the second slider 483B at the upper end of the second movable partition member 48B can stably move along the second slide shaft 442B. Further, the guide shafts 843a, 843c; 843b, 843d and the second slide shaft 442B are made of metal such as stainless steel, the rollers 841a, 841b; 841c, 841d are made of synthetic resin such as polyacetal, and the roller shafts 842a, 842b. ; 842c and 842d are formed of a metal such as stainless steel, respectively, so that there is an advantage that smooth sliding and rotation are possible and wear of the surrounding resin material can be prevented.

FIG. 43 shows an enlarged back view of the second slider 483B with the lid member 484 removed.
The second slider 483B is formed so as to have a hollow inside. As shown in FIG. 43, the second slider 483B has the two roller shafts 842a, 842b; 842c, 842d on the back side thereof. Engagement recesses 486a, 486b; 486c, 486d are formed in which the front ends are engaged. In addition, guide shaft storage portions 487a and 487b in which the guide shafts 843a and 843c are stored in a vertical posture are provided at the left and right ends of the back surface of the second slider 483B, and in the vicinity thereof, the upper and lower sides of the guide shafts 843b and 843d. Guide shaft pressing convex portions 488a, 488b; 488c, 488d are formed on both end portions, which contact from the front side and press toward the lid member 484.
Furthermore, a belt engagement portion 483d having unevenness that can mesh with a plurality of teeth of the belt 443B is provided at the upper end of the belt clamping portion 483c provided so as to protrude from the upper surface of the second slider 483B. The first slider 483A is also different from the second slider 483B in that it has a symmetrical shape and has the same structure. Therefore, the description of the structure of the first slider 483A is omitted.

FIG. 44 shows an enlarged perspective view of the lower horizontal support portion 482 provided at the lower end portion of the second movable partition member 48B.
As shown in FIG. 44, the second partition member left position detection piece 482a is located at the left end of the lower horizontal support portion 482, and the second partition member right position is located at the front right end portion of the lower horizontal support portion 482. A detection piece 482b is provided. The position detection member 487 provided in the lower horizontal support portion 482 has a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a flat wiring cable 489B drawn from the upper LED board 486 is disposed along the vertical piece 487c. It is folded on the horizontal piece 487d to change its direction, and extends in the direction of the second partition member right position detection piece 482b along the horizontal piece 487d, and downward from the slit-like broken line lead-out part 487e provided in the middle. It is configured to be pulled out. The position detection member 487 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 487f, and the position detection member 487 is fixed to the lower end portion of the second movable partition member 48B through the screw holes 487f with screws (not shown). It has become. The lower horizontal support portion 481 (see FIG. 30) of the lower end portion of the first movable partition member 48A has a similar structure.

45, the flat wiring cable 489B drawn from the second movable partition member 48B, the flat wiring cable 489A drawn from the first movable partition member 48A, and the lower portion of the mounting base member 434 (see FIG. 29) are fixed. The relationship with the accessory relay board 436 is shown.
Since the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B can move from the right side to the left side of the display device 41 or vice versa, the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are shown in FIG. The length is set so that the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are in a relaxed state when each is in the initial position. Further, the ends of the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are configured to be electrically connected to terminals on the board side on the lower surface side of the accessory relay board 436, respectively.

FIG. 46 shows the relationship between the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B and the accessory relay board 436 when the first movable partition member 48A moves to the left side and the second movable partition member 48B moves to the right side. . In this case, as shown in FIG. 46A, the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B overlap when viewed from the front. However, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are displaced forward and backward with the intermediate member 435 interposed therebetween, so the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are in the opposite directions. Even if it moves, the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B do not interfere with each other.
Moreover, since the tips of the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are connected to the terminals on the board side on the lower surface side of the accessory relay board 436, even if the cables are deformed by moving so that the cables cross each other, the cables It is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the connecting portion of the cable, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a failure in which the connecting portion of the cable is disconnected due to repeated movement of the movable partition member.

47 and 48 show the detailed structure of the first special variable winning device 38. FIG. FIG. 47A is a perspective view of the first special variable winning device 38 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the first special variable winning device 38 viewed from the rear side. is there. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the first special variable winning device 38 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the first special variable prize winning device 38 mainly includes a base member 380 that is long in the left-right direction and has an opening in the substantially central portion in the left-right direction, and the opening of the base member 380 from the front. An open / close door 38c that is openably and closably mounted in the opening so as to cover; a front decorative member 381 that is mounted at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the base member 380 and has an opening corresponding to the opening of the base member 380; A left prize opening forming member 382 attached to the left front portion of the base member 380, a right prize opening forming member 383 attached to the right front portion of the base member 380, a left rear portion and a rear right portion of the base member 380; Circuit board cover members 530 and 530 attached to the base member 380, and a prize winning opening member 384 attached to a substantially central portion of the rear surface of the base member 380 so as to cover the opening of the base member 380 from the rear. Count switches 38a and 38a for detecting a game ball that is disposed in the first prize opening member 384 and that has won the first special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38, and mounted on the rear surface of the big prize opening member 384. A lens member 385 and a solenoid base member 386 attached to the rear surface of the lens member 385.

The left winning port forming member 382 and the right winning port forming member 383 are each provided with a general winning port 35. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), of the base member 380 and the substrate cover members 530 and 530, the position behind the general winning opening 35 provided in the left winning opening forming member 382 and the right winning opening formation. A winning ball guiding path 35d for guiding a game ball won in the general winning port 35 to the winning port switch 35a is provided at both of the positions behind the general winning port 35 provided in the member 383. ing. The winning ball guiding path 35d is provided from the front side to the rear side of the game board 30 main body. That is, a winning ball guiding path 35d having a depth (length in the front-rear direction) reaching the rear surface of the game board 30 main body is formed by the thickness of the base member 380 and the board cover member 530.
The big winning opening member 384 is provided with a start winning ball flow path 37d through which a game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 disposed above the first special variable winning device 38 passes.

An LED substrate 387 for irradiating light from the rear of the lens member 385 is attached to the substantially central portion of the front surface of the solenoid base member 386.
The LED is provided on the LED board 387 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 387), and the first special prize winning device 38 is irradiated from the LED of the LED board 387 and can transmit light. The lens member 385, the special prize opening member 384, and the base member 380 which are formed of a light-transmitting material are configured so that the inside of the special prize opening and the opening / closing door 38c can be illuminated.

Here, the front decoration member 381, the left prize opening forming member 382, and the right prize opening forming member 383 are configured not to transmit light (or to hardly transmit light). Therefore, only the portion of the periphery of the opening / closing door 38c that is not covered with the front decorative member 381 can be seen as if it is shining with the light from the LED of the LED substrate 387.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, a decorative lens portion 380a in which a lens cut for light diffusion is formed on the front surface or the like is provided below the opening of the base member 380. An opening 381a is provided in a portion corresponding to the decorative lens portion 380a of the front decorative member 381, and as shown in FIG. 47, the opening portion is mounted in a state where the front decorative member 381 is mounted on the front surface of the base member 380. The decorative lens portion 380a is exposed from 381a. Thereby, at least the decorative lens portion 380a in the periphery of the opening / closing door 38c can appear to shine with the light from the LED of the LED substrate 387.

Further, the solenoid base member 386 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid 38b capable of generating a driving force for opening and closing the open / close door 38c and a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud. The lens member 385 is provided with a through hole 385a through which the magnetic sensor switch 61 can be inserted. It is constructed so as to reach the vicinity of the winning prize opening member 384) or the large winning prize opening. Thus, it is possible to detect fraud such as guiding the game ball to the first special variation winning device 38 or the normal variation winning device 37 using a magnet.
In addition, an opening / closing link member 38d for connecting the opening / closing door 38c and the special prize opening solenoid 38b is attached to the tip of the plunger of the special prize opening solenoid 38b.

The linear light emitting unit 500 mainly includes a linear lens unit 510 provided on the base member 380, an LED substrate 520 for irradiating light from the rear of the lens unit 510, and the LED substrate 520 as the lens unit 510. And a substrate cover member 530 for supporting at the rear.
The front decorative member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, and the right winning port forming member 383 configured so as not to transmit light (or hardly transmit light) are formed so as to avoid the lens portion 510. 380 is attached to the front surface. Therefore, the front decoration member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, and the right winning port forming member 383 are completely divided into three.

In the present embodiment, two LEDs 520a are provided on the LED board 520 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 520), but the number of LEDs 520a provided on the LED board 520 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. It is.
The substrate cover member 530 is preferably configured not to transmit light (or to hardly transmit light). The shape of the substrate cover member 530 is such that light from the LED 520a of the LED substrate 520 does not leak (or is difficult to leak) from the substrate cover member 530 or the gap between the substrate cover member 530 and the base member 380. Is preferred.

  That is, the gaming member (the surrounding frame body 40 and the winning opening device (the first special variation winning device 38, etc.)) is provided behind the translucent base member 380 having the linear lens portion 510 and the lens portion 510. A light emitting unit (LED 520a) that irradiates light toward the lens unit 510, and a decoration that covers the front of the base member 380 in a state in which irradiation light from the light emitting unit (LED 520a) is emitted to the front of the lens unit 510 Members (a front decoration member 381, a left winning port forming member 382, a right winning port forming member 383).

FIG. 49 shows a detailed structure of the base member 380. FIG. 49 is a front view of the base member 380.
50 and 51 show the detailed structure of the lens portion 510 included in the base member 380. FIG. 50A is a perspective view of the lens unit 510 provided on the right part of the base member 380 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 50B is provided on the right part of the base member 380. It is the perspective view which looked at the lens part 510 from the rear surface side. 51A is a perspective view of the lens portion 510 provided on the left portion of the base member 380 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 51B is provided on the left portion of the base member 380. It is the perspective view which looked at the lens part 510 from the rear surface side.
FIG. 52 shows the detailed structure of the front decoration member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, and the right winning port forming member 383. FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the front decorative member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, and the right winning port forming member 383 as viewed from the rear side.
Further, FIG. 53 shows a detailed structure of the linear light emitting unit 500 included in the first special variation winning device 38. FIG. 53 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the linear light emitting unit 500 provided on the left part of the first special variation winning device 38, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the -A line.

As shown in FIG. 49, linear lens portions 510 are provided on the left and right sides of the opening of the base member 380, respectively. The left lens portion 510 provided to the left of the opening of the base member 380 is wider than the right lens portion 510 provided to the right of the opening of the base member 380, and the left lens portion 510 and the right lens portion 510 are The area (occupied area) of the lens unit 510 is different.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 47A and 53B, the lens portion 510 includes a front surface and a substantially surface of a decorative member (a front decorative member 381, a left winning port forming member 382, a right winning port forming member 383). It is configured to project from the front surface of the base member 380 so as to be one. The lens portion 510 is projected from the front surface of the base member 380 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative member (the front decorative member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, the right winning port forming member 383). Also good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 50A, 51A, and 53B, the base member 380 is a space extending in the front-rear direction on both sides of the lens portion 510 on the front surface of the base member 380. As part, it has entrance recessed part 380b, 380b formed by denting both sides of the lens part 510 toward back.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, a portion corresponding to the entry recess 380b of the base member 380 among the end portions of the front decoration member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, and the right winning port forming member 383 has a space portion (entrance). An entry portion 381b that enters the recess portion 380b) from the front and covers the side surface of the lens portion 510 is provided. That is, the entry portion 381b is provided in each of the first decorative member (front decorative member 381) and the second decorative member (left winning port forming member 382, right winning port forming member 383).
As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the entry recess 380b protrudes from the rear surface of the decorative member (the front decoration member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, the right winning port forming member 383), and the back of the entering recess 380b. It is blocked by an entry portion 381b reaching the portion.

  As shown in FIGS. 50B, 51B, and 53B, a light receiving concave portion 510a that is recessed forward is formed along the extending direction of the lens portion 510 at the rear portion of the lens portion 510. Is formed. As a result, the light from the LED 520a can be effectively taken into the lens unit 510 as compared with the case where the light receiving recess 510a is not formed and the rear surface of the lens unit 510 and the rear surface of the base member 380 are flush with each other. It becomes possible. Further, as in the present embodiment, the light receiving recess 510a extends forward from the entry end of the entry portion 381b, whereby the light from the LED 520a can be more effectively taken into the lens portion 510. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, a lens cut for light diffusion is formed on the front end (front surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the protruding end portion (front surface portion of the lens portion 510) of the lens portion 510. Has been.
Here, in this embodiment, although each lens unit 510 has a different area, the number of LEDs 520a that irradiate each lens portion 510 is the same number (two in this embodiment). Therefore, in order to improve the difference in the amount of light, it is preferable to change the lens cut formed in each lens unit 510 (specifically, change the cut width, etc.). Thereby, regardless of the area of the lens portion 510, the appearance of light in each lens portion 510 is substantially the same.

As shown in FIG. 52, the surface of the entry portion 381b that faces the side surface of the lens portion 510 is a reflection surface 381c covered with a reflection film (a reflection film formed by plating, vapor deposition, or the like). . That is, the entrance portion 381b is formed with a reflection surface 381c that can reflect light emitted from the side surface of the lens portion 510 toward the front surface of the lens portion 510. Accordingly, even if a plurality of LEDs are not provided side by side along the lens unit 510 behind the lens unit 510, the entire lens unit 510 can be seen to shine.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the lens portion 510 has a lens cut in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the lens portion 510 (that is, the cut width direction is along the longitudinal direction of the lens portion 510). Is formed. Thus, even if a plurality of LEDs are not provided side by side along the lens unit 510 behind the lens unit 510, the lens unit 510 efficiently shines from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction (that is, the entire lens unit 510). Can be seen as

The front decoration member 381, the left prize opening forming member 382, and the right prize opening forming member 383 are configured not to transmit light (or hardly transmit light), and at least the lens portion of the entry portion 381b. The surface which opposes the side surface of 510 should just be covered with the reflecting film.
Furthermore, at least the inner surface of the substrate cover member 530 can be a reflective surface covered with a reflective film (a reflective film formed by plating or vapor deposition). Thereby, since the light from LED520a can be reflected by the inner surface of the board | substrate cover member 530, it can be shown that the whole lens part 510 is shining more efficiently.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 50B and 51B, a cylindrical cover member mounting boss 380c is provided on the rear surface of the base member 380 along the front-rear direction. On the other hand, a screw hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in a portion of the substrate cover member 530 corresponding to the cover member mounting boss 380c. That is, in a state where the rear left part and the rear right part of the base member 380 are covered with the substrate cover member 530, screws (not shown) are inserted from the rear of the substrate cover member 530 through the screw holes provided in the substrate cover member 530. The board cover member 530 can be fixed to the base member 380 by being inserted into the cover member mounting boss 380c.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52, cylindrical mounting bosses 381d, 382d, and 383d extending in the front-rear direction are provided on the rear surfaces of the front decoration member 381, the left winning port forming member 382, and the right winning port forming member 383. Yes. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49, screw holes 380d penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in portions of the base member 380 corresponding to the mounting bosses 381d, 382d, and 383d. That is, the front decoration member 381, the left prize opening forming member 382, and the right prize opening forming member 383 have the front center part, the front left part, and the front right part of the base member 380 at the front decoration member 381, the left prize opening forming member. 382 and the right prize opening forming member 383, respectively, and screws (not shown) are inserted into the mounting bosses 381d, 382d, and 383d from the rear of the base member 380 through the screw holes 380d provided in the base member 380. By doing so, the base member 380 can be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lens portion 510 is provided from one end portion of the base member 380 to the other end portion. The length of the lens unit 510 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the lens unit 510 is such that the first decorative member (front decorative member 381) and the second decorative member (left winning port forming member 382, right winning port). The length of the gap formed with the forming member 383) is substantially the same as the length of the extending direction (the direction substantially perpendicular to the width direction of the gap) or longer than the length of the gap in the extending direction. One end portion and the other end portion in the longitudinal direction of the lens portion 510 protrude outward from the one end portion and the other end portion of the base member 380.
That is, the lens unit 510 includes a first decorative member (front decorative member 381) that covers one side of the front surface of the base member 380 across the lens unit 510, and the other front surface of the base member 380 across the lens unit 510. The base member 380 extends from one end portion to the other end portion so as to isolate the second decorative member (the left winning port forming member 382 and the right winning port forming member 383).

Here, in this embodiment, the base member 380 and the lens portion 510 are integrally formed to ensure the extended width (extended length) of the linear light emitting portion 500 as much as possible.
If the base member and the lens part are separated, it is possible to attach the lens part to the base member by fitting the lens part into the lens part mounting opening established in the base member. The extended width of the linear light emitting unit 500 is restricted by the mouth. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the linear light emitting unit 500 extending from one end portion to the other end portion of the base member 380 is formed by integrally forming the base member 380 and the lens portion 510. It becomes possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the lens portion 510 in the extending direction is set so that the first decorative member (front decorative member 381) and the second decorative member (left winning port forming member 382, right winning port forming member 383) The length of the gap formed in the direction of extension of the gap is substantially the same as or longer than the length of the gap in the direction of extension of the gap, thereby relevance (continuity) with the line display of the display device 41. ) Is easier to emphasize.

As shown in FIG. 54, the entry recesses 380b and the entry ends of the entry part 381b may extend to the side of the light emitting part (LED 520a).
As a result, not only the side surface of the lens unit 510 but also the side of the LED 520a is covered with the reflection surface 381c of the entry unit 381b, so that the irradiation light of the LED 520a can be reflected to the lens unit 510 without leaving any excess.

  In addition, the space extending in the front-rear direction on both sides of the lens unit 510 is not limited to the one formed by the entry recess 380b in which both sides of the lens unit 510 are recessed rearward, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. It is. Specifically, for example, the space portion may not have a bottom portion (a portion corresponding to the back portion of the entry recess 380b). In other words, the base member 380 may be allowed to enter from the front side to the rear side through the space portion. In this case, the entry end of the entry portion 381b is extended to the front surface of the LED substrate 520. It is preferable that the space portion be closed by the entry portion 381b.

FIG. 55 is a block diagram of the control system of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a signal from the interface chip (I / F) 121 connected to the proximity switch in the input unit 120 (start winning detection signal). Is provided with an inverter 112 such as an inverter that logically inverts the signal and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed, and an individual IC register 111D.
The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like.
The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a second half variation pattern table and a first half variation pattern table.

  Reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can change, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state. This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (reliability is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), special 4 reach (SP4 reach, premier reach), etc. are set.
The reliability increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <special 4 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control.
Although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 is a jackpot determining random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various reach and reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display with no change), a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game, and the like from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal), a clock generator is provided that generates a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do.
In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs the ID stored in the individual ID register 111D from the information transmission unit 71 at the time of power-on, at the occurrence of an event such as a big hit, or when the fraud is detected by a magnet or radio wave.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 outputs a launch permission signal that permits the launch of the game ball to the launch control device 201 that controls the launch device on the condition that it is electrically connected to the card unit.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, and a general winning port. The switch 35a and the count switch 38a are connected via the proximity I / F 121. When the connected switch is a proximity switch, the proximity I / F 121 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. It is an interface chip that converts to Proximity I / F 121 seems to be floating because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  All the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are supplied to the second input port 122 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. It is like that. In addition, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 122. It is configured. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 is assumed to receive a signal from a microswitch or the like, and is detected as a negative logic, that is, a low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a start winning opening 36 converted by signals from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the proximity I / F 121. The start port 1 switch 36 a in the inside, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34 a, the general winning port switch 35 a, and the count switch 38 a, and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. A second input port 122 is provided to supply the input. The data held by the second input port 122 is read by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 122. be able to. The same applies to other ports described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 123 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 124 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 124 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 123 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 124 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a 4-bit data signal output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data, and a data strobe signal SSTB output to the effect control device 300. 1 and a second output port 132 for generating an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication. In addition, the data strobe signal from the first output port 131 is provided to the output unit 130 so that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300, that is, to ensure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer 133 that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the SSTB and the second output port 132 is provided. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 to transmit data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 134 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 134 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 134.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 134 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 134 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a first special variable prize winning device 38 (a large prize opening solenoid) 38b and a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) to open a movable member 37b of the normal variable winning prize device 37. ) According to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, the third output port 135 for outputting the open / close data of 37c and the on / off data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected, for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 The fifth output port 137 is provided. Information relating to the gaming machine 10 output from the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (not shown) installed in a game store.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the big prize opening solenoid 38b output from the third output port 135, and receives the solenoid driving signal and the opening / closing data signal of the power solenoid 37c to generate the solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a for outputting, a second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c that outputs the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third display device 50, and the external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device is transmitted. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the unit (external information terminal board) 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the third driver 138c that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the second driver 138b for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs 12 V, and drawing the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 134, the third output port 135, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 1000. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection apparatus 1000 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 122 and 123 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312, and various melody and sound effects such as speakers (audio output unit) A sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound for reproduction from 19a and 19b is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and an audio ROM 324 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Fluctuation start command, start opening winning effect command, starting opening winning effect design command, customer waiting demonstration command, fanfare command, probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 A variation stop command, a big hit end command, an error designation command, etc. are received as an effect control command signal. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the surrounding frame body 40), and the front frame 12. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device 18 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the board, and a board effect device 44 (for example, display) provided on the game board 30 (including the surrounding frame body 40) A panel effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the device 41, and a frame effect device 45 provided in the front frame 12 (for example, the moving light 16). A frame effect motor control circuit 335 is provided to drive and control a motor that operates the motor. These control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps, motors and solenoids are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340.

In the present embodiment, the display section partition effect unit 440, the lower movable unit 830 of the lower effect unit 800, the side movable unit 940 of the side effect unit 900, and the like correspond to the board effect device 44, and the lower effect unit. The LEDs in 800, the LEDs in the side effect unit 900, and the like correspond to the board decoration device 46.
Further, the effect control device 300 includes an on / off state of a switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and an effect motor switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the lower speaker 19b is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 made up of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and speaker, and a reference for these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are set in a reset state. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification information is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general-purpose display, processing for displaying a general-purpose variable display game to be stopped is performed. If the result of this normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37 for a predetermined time. The opening control is performed as described above (for example, for 0.3 seconds).
In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed.
In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display, processing for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed.
In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state (production mode) is set, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. .

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display and generates a special game state. I do.
In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the big prize opening. I do.
Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. The control (cycle game) is performed by releasing (repeating) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 10 times, or 2 times).
When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the deviation on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (ordinary high probability state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 milliseconds is 600 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). Is 704 milliseconds). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 300 milliseconds is 800 milliseconds). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of the general electric power) is not equal to the first number of times of opening for one time with respect to the result of one hit of the normal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) in the normal operation state (high normal probability) State).

In the short time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the time of normal power release, and the probability of normal time. Make the conversion time longer than usual.
Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.
In the following description and drawings, the short time state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, a general power support state, or a power support state.

Next, control of the gaming machine 10 will be described.
First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 59 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
The main process is started when the gaming machine 10 is turned on.
In this main process, as shown in FIG. 57, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) is first performed to set a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. Step S2), a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs (Step S3), an interrupt mode setting process for setting an interrupt processing mode (Step S3) S4) is performed.

Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control apparatus (payout board) 200 to start normally, for example, a time of 4 milliseconds is waited (step S5). As a result, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, and the payout control device 200 misses the command. Can be avoided.
Next, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted, and OFF data for setting no output to all output ports is output (steps S6 and S7).
Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is not used in this embodiment because it performs parallel communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) is set to a state in which it is not used. Processing is performed (step S8).

Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is ON (step S9).
If it is determined in step S9 that the initialization switch is OFF (step S9; No), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (step S10). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S11).
If it is determined in step S11 that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S11; Yes), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (Step S12), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S13).
If it is determined in step S13 that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S13; Yes), a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is calculated (step S14), and the calculated checksum and the power interruption are calculated. The current checksum is compared (step S15), and it is determined whether the checksums match (step S16).
If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums match (step S16; Yes), the process proceeds to step S17 in FIG.

  Moreover, when it determines with the initialization switch being ON at step S9 (step S9; Yes), or when it determines with the value of a power failure inspection area | region not being normal at step S11 or step S13 (step S11; No or step S13; No) ) If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums do not match (step S16; No), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. 58 to perform initialization processing.

In step S17 of FIG. 58, all the power outage inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared (step S18), and the areas related to errors and fraud monitoring are reset (step S19).
Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20).
If it is determined in step S20 that the state is not a high probability state (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20 that the state is a high probability state (step S20; Yes), ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S21), and the high probability provided in the collective display device 50, for example, is set. The ON data for turning on (turning on) the notification LED (probability state display section) is saved in the segment area (step S22).
Next, a process (step S23) of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a special figure game process number prepared for rationally executing a special figure game process described later to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S23). Proceed to S29.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S24), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S25), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S26).
Next, a time value for outputting the external information related to RWM clear is set (step S27), a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the individual identification information is acquired from the individual ID register 111D, set in the serial communication circuit, and output from the information transmission unit 71.
Next, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed (step S30). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S30, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S31). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Next, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S32), the interruption is permitted (step S33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Next, initial value random number update processing (step S34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number (big hit random number) generated in a random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a soft random number generated by software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S34, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S35), and the power failure monitoring signal is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S36).
If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S36; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S34) (step S33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S34 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed, and if it is only within the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S36; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S35. Determination is made (step S37).
If it is determined in step S37 that it is not continued (step S37; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S36).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S37 that it is continuing (step S37; Yes), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S38), all output ports The process of outputting OFF data to (step S39).

Next, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S41).
Next, a process for calculating the checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S42), a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S43), and a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S44) are performed. After that, it waits for the power supply of the gaming machine 10 to be cut off. As described above, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power interruption is calculated, so that the information stored in the RWM before the power interruption of the gaming machine 10 due to the power failure is properly backed up. It can be determined whether or not the gaming machine 10 is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the CPU 111A, the timer interrupt process in FIG. 59 is started.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first performs a register save process (step S51) for transferring a value held in a predetermined register to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.

Next, input from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, usual gate switch 34a, general winning port switch 35a, count switch 38a, etc.), that is, the state of each input port is read. An input process (step S52) is performed.
Next, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S53) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening SOL38b, ordinary electric power SOL37c) or the like is performed.

Next, a command transmission process (step S54), a random number update process 1 (step S55), and a random number update process 2 (step S56) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like. )I do.
Next, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the general winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a, and error monitoring (front surface). A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S57) is performed to determine whether or not the frame or the glass frame is open.
Next, a special figure game process (step S58) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game, and a general figure game process (step S59) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S60) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to games to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor switch 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S61) for checking whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from, vibration fraud monitoring process (step S62) for checking whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor switch 62, External information editing processing (step S63) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer.
Next, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S64), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S51 (step S65), and an interrupt permitting process (step S65) S66) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S58) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described.
In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the special game process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first starts the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. )I do.
In this start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the start winning port 36 that forms the first start winning port and the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted. The game result prior determination is performed in advance to determine the game result based on the winning in the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning.

Next, the count switch monitoring process 1 (step A2) is performed.
In the count switch monitoring process 1, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
Next, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already expired or the special figure game processing timer has been updated (-1) (step A3). It is determined whether the time is up (step A4).

If it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has expired (step A4; Yes), a special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5) is performed, and a process (step A6) of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed using the table.
Next, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A7), the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the special figure game process number.

If the special figure game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, the special figure fluctuation processing A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
Also, if the special figure game process number is “1” in step A8, the special figure is changing to set the stop display time of the special figure or to set the information necessary for performing the special figure display process. Processing (step A10) is performed.
In addition, when the special figure game process number is “2” in step A8, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big win for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the mouth opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

Also, if the special figure game process number is “3” in step A8, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A12) to be performed is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “4” in step A8, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.
In step A8, if the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening, or a big hit end process The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “6” in step A8, the big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process (step A9) is performed.

Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display (step A16), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A17) related to the special figure 1 display is performed.
Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) related to the special figure 2 display is performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has not expired (step A4; No), the process proceeds to step A16, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the start port switch monitoring process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) ( Step A111) and special figure start port switch common processing (step A112) are performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won (step). A113).
If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Yes), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; No), it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number. (Step A114), it is determined whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (Step A115). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; No), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) ( Step A116), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A117) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start-port switch common processing (steps A112 and A117) in the above-described start-port switch monitoring processing will be described.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the special figure start port switch common processing, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first starts the monitoring target start port switch (the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a). For example, it is checked whether there is an input to the start port 1 switch 36a or the like (step A201), and it is determined whether there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202).
If it is determined in step A202 that there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A202; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A202 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; Yes), after saving the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step A203), The extracted big hit random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A204).

Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings for the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times output (start port signal output number) is loaded (step A205).
Next, the start port signal output count is updated (+1) to check whether the output count overflows (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207).

When it is determined in step A207 that the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; No), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. To do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A207 that the output count overflows (step A207; Yes), the process proceeds to step A209.
And, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of special figure reservation (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is less than the upper limit value. Is checked (step A209), and it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit value (step A210).

If it is determined in step A210 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step A210; Yes), the number of special figure hold to be updated (for example, the number of special figure hold 1) is updated (+1). Processing (step A215) is performed.
Next, after preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (MODE) of the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A216). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A217), and a command setting process (step A218) is performed.
Next, the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the special figure hold number is calculated (step A219), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number saving area of the RWM (step A220).

Next, the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A221), and saved in the big hit symbol random number saving area of the RWM (step A222).
Next, the corresponding variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the save area of each random number of the RWM (steps A223, A224, A225), and the special figure hold information determination process (step A226) is performed to start the special figure The mouth switch common processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A210 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step A210; No), it is checked whether the input of the start port switch according to step A202 is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a. (Step A211), it is determined whether or not the input is the start port 1 switch 36a (Step A212).
If it is determined in step A212 that the input is for the start port 1 switch 36a (step A212; Yes), a decoration special figure hold number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step A213), and command setting processing (step A214) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A212 that the input of the start port 1 switch 36a is not input (step A212; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A226) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described.
The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the special figure hold information determination process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a winning of the starting port 2 (winning to the normal variable winning device 37) is made. (Step A231).
If it is determined in step A231 that the start port 2 has been won (step A231; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is at a high probability (high probability state) (step A233).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A231 that the start port 2 is not won (step A231; No), it is determined whether or not the electric support (short time state) or big hit (special game state) is being performed (step A232). ).

If it is determined in step A232 that the electric support or big hit is being made (step A232; Yes), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A232 that there is no power support or big hit (step A232; No), it is determined whether or not it is a high probability (high probability state) (step A233).

If it is determined in step A233 that the probability is high (step A233; Yes), a determination value for high probability is set (step A234), and the target big hit random number is loaded (step A236). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A237).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A233 that it is not a high probability (step A233; No), a determination value for a low probability (normal probability state) is set (step A235), and the target big hit random number is loaded (step A235). Step A236). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A237).

When it is determined in step A237 that it is a big hit (step A237; Yes), a big hit symbol information table (see FIG. 65) corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A238), and the target big hit symbol random number is set. Is loaded (step A239). Thereafter, symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired from the set jackpot symbol information table (step A240), a symbol information command corresponding to the acquired symbol information is prepared (step A242), and command setting processing is performed (step A240). Step A243).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A237 that the game is not a big hit (step A237; No), the symbol information is obtained (step A241), and the symbol information command corresponding to the acquired symbol information is prepared (step A242). Then, command setting processing is performed (step A243).

Next, the target variation pattern random number 1 is loaded (step A244), a variation pattern random number command corresponding to the target variation pattern random number 1 is prepared (step A245), command setting processing is performed (step A246), The hold information determination process ends.
By this processing, a special figure holding number command is transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the occurrence of the start memory, and then the special figure type / symbol information command and the variation pattern random number are given as advance determination information (predetermined command). Command is sent. Then, the production control device 300 increases the special figure start memory number based on the decoration special figure reservation number command, and performs a pre-production (prefetching production) based on the symbol information command and the variation pattern random number command.
That is, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 alert | reports a result relevant information to a player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display apparatus 41, etc. Is possible.

  Here, for jackpot random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers that need to improve confidentiality (influence the results), the result information after determination is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as symbol information commands. On the other hand, for the fluctuation pattern random number that does not need to improve confidentiality (does not affect the result), as the fluctuation pattern random number command, the random number value is left as it is or converted into information indicating the random value, and the effect control device 300 To send to. Note that the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system (variation group) of the second half fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a random number for performing detailed distribution from the reach system. Pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation. Since it is sufficient that even the reach system can be transmitted to the production control device 300 side at the time of prior determination, information regarding the fluctuation pattern random number 1 may be transmitted.

Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.
Further, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 may be included in the variation pattern random number command, or a command indicating the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 may be transmitted instead of the variation pattern random number command. Anyway. That is, all the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, or the variation pattern number may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 after the variation pattern is determined as at the start of variation. good.

Here, FIG. 65 (a) shows a jackpot symbol information table corresponding to the start port 1 switch 36a in the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 (b) shows a jackpot symbol information corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the present embodiment. An information table is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), the special results are set with a plurality of types in which the special game state execution mode and the additional game value given to the player after the special game state ends are different. The game control device 100 selects a special result based on the jackpot symbol random number extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening. That is, it can be said that the execution mode of the special gaming state and the amount of additional game value are determined based on the jackpot symbol random number.

It should be noted that the execution mode of the special gaming state in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the number of rounds that can be executed, the opening time of the big winning opening, and the type of the big winning opening to be opened (upper AT (second special variable winning apparatus 39 ), Lower AT (first special variable winning device 38)).
Further, the additional game value means that the game state is set to a high probability state until the next special result mode is derived after the special game state ends, or a special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state ends. It is to be in a short time state.
Further, based on the jackpot symbol random number, it is also determined whether the probability state is notified (probability clear) or not notified (probability ambiguous) after the end of the special gaming state.
In addition, the distribution of special results is such that the probability that a special result advantageous to the player is selected in the second special figure variation display game is higher than that in the first special figure variation display game.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the special figure routine processing, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first checks whether the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step A302).
If it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step A303). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A304).
If it is determined in step A304 that the number of special figure 1 hold is 0 (step A304; Yes), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A305), and the customer waiting demo has already started. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A306).

If it is determined in step A306 that the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A306; No), a customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A307). Then, the customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A308), the command setting process (step A309), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A310) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A306 that the customer waiting demo has been started (step A306; Yes), the customer waiting demo flag is already saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A307), and the customer waiting demo command is displayed. Is also prepared (step A308) and the command setting process (step A309) is also executed, so the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A310) is performed without performing these processes, and the special figure normal process is terminated. To do.

In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, a process number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a special prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like are set.
Further, when it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A302; No), or when it is determined in step A304 that the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A304; No), the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. A jackpot flag setting process (step A311) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, a special symbol stop symbol setting process (step A312), which is a process related to setting a special symbol stop symbol (symbol information), specifically, a special symbol stop symbol determination process based on the presence / absence of a jackpot flag and a symbol random number. ), The signal corresponding to the special figure stop symbol number of the special figure stop symbol that has been set is saved in the test signal output data area (step A313), and the symbol information is saved as the special symbol (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2). ) Is saved in the symbol information (work) area corresponding to ().

Next, the special figure fluctuation flag corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A315), and a table for setting information regarding the fluctuation pattern is prepared (step A316).
Next, a variation pattern setting process (step A317) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game and a variation start information setting process (step A318) for setting variation start information are performed. In this variation start information setting process, a variation pattern command including information related to a variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game, a decoration special-figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the ornament special-figure variation display game, and display A decoration special figure hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) related to the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the device 41 is prepared. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Subsequently, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A319) is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated. In the special figure changing process transition setting process, the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, the test signal relating to the change of the first special figure, or the second special figure Test signal during fluctuation, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (for example, flag relating to fluctuation of the special figure 1 display, period of blinking of the special figure 1 display) The initial value of the timer, etc.) or information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display (for example, the flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display, the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display) Perform processing to set the initial value of the timer.

  In this way, when the special figure 2 hold number in step A301 and step A302 is checked before the special figure 1 hold number check in steps A303 and A304, the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. Is executed from the big hit flag setting process (step A311) based on the second start memory to the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A319), the special figure 2 hold number is 0 and the special figure 1 hold number is not 0. In this case, the special chart changing process transition setting process (step A319) is executed from the big hit flag setting process (step A311) based on the first start memory. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A317) in the above-described special figure routine process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 66, in the variation pattern setting process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first checks whether the symbol information (for work) is off symbol information (step A321), and the off symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is information (step A322).
If it is determined in step A322 that the symbol information is out of place (step A322; Yes), a variation group selection table (see FIGS. 68 and 69) corresponding to the current gaming state is prepared (step A323). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A325).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A322 that the symbol information is not out of place (step A322; No), the big hit time fluctuation group selection table (see FIG. 67) corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is displayed. Prepare (step A324), and load and prepare the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target area (step A325).

Next, a 2-byte distribution process (step A326) is performed, and the address of the reach system obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A327).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A328), and a sorting process (step A329) is performed to obtain the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the sorting (step A330).
Next, the latter-half variation number is saved in the target latter-half variation number area (step A331), and it is checked whether the latter-half variation number is a number for non-reach variation (step A332). Determine (step A333).

When it is determined in step A333 that the number is a variation without reach (step A333; Yes), the first half variation selection table 1 (for no reach) is prepared (step A334), and the variation pattern random number 3 is obtained from the target region. Is prepared by loading (step A336).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A333 that the number is not a reachless variation number (step A333; No), the first half variation selection table 2 (for reach) is prepared (step A335), and the variation pattern random number 3 from the target region. Is prepared by loading (step A336).
Next, a sorting process is performed (step A337), and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step A338), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.
With the above processing, a variation group (any of reach, normal reach, SP1 to 4 reach, or common variation (described later)) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1, and detailed variation is selected from the variation groups based on the variation pattern random number 2. The distribution of effects (selection of variation pattern) is performed, and the variation mode of the first half variation until reaching the reach state is selected based on the variation pattern random number 3.

In the variation group selection table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 67, only the variation group that reaches the reach state can be selected. Also, SP4 reach can be selected only in the case of the second special figure variation display game.
In the variation group selection table at the time of losing of the first special figure variation display game and the variation group selection table at the time of detachment of the second special figure variation display game, a table to be used depending on whether or not it is in the short time state (the public power support state). Is different, and when it is not in the short-time state (general power support state) (when it is a low-probability state in general), the table of FIG. 68 is used. Use a table.

Further, the table to be used differs depending on the first start memory number, and when the time is not short, the first start memory number is 1 when the first start memory number is 1, that is, when the first special figure variable display game is started. 68, the table of FIG. 68A is used for the special figure variation display game, and the table of FIG. 68B is used when the first start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. The larger the first start memory number, the shorter the reach time and the normal reach variation time, so that the first start memory can be quickly digested.
Similarly, in the case of the second start memory, the table to be used differs depending on the second start memory number. If the time start state is not short, when the second start memory number is 1, that is, by the start of the second special figure variable display game. When the second start memory number is changed from 1 to 0, the table of FIG. 68 (c) is used for the special figure variation display game, and when the second start memory number is 2, 3 or 4, FIG. Use a table. The larger the second start memory number, the shorter the reach time of no reach and normal reach, so that the second start memory can be quickly digested.

In the short-time state, when the first start memory number is 1, that is, when the first start memory number is changed from 1 to 0 by the start of the first special figure change display game, the special figure change display is performed. The table of FIG. 69A is used for the game, and the table of FIG. 69B is used when the first start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. Also in this case, when the number of first start memories is large, there is no reach and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shortened, so that the first start memories can be quickly digested. In addition, the fluctuation time without reach when the first start memory number is 1 is longer than the fluctuation time without reach when not in the short-time state, and the special time fluctuation in the short-time state which is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state The display game is prevented from being interrupted.
Similarly, in the case of the second start memory, when the time is short, the second start memory number is changed from 1 to 0 when the second start memory number is 1, that is, by the start of the second special figure variable display game. Sometimes, the table of FIG. 69 (c) is used for the special figure variation display game, and the table of FIG. 69 (d) is used when the second start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. Also in this case, when the number of second start memories is large, there is no reach and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shortened, so that the second start memories can be quickly digested.

Here, the fluctuation group of non-reach and normal reach is defined as a common fluctuation. When the common variation is selected, the effect control device 300 is configured to determine whether to select a variation group without reach or a variation group with normal reach. This common variation is longer than the unreachable variation time when not in the short-time state, and prevents the special-variation display game from being interrupted in the short-time state that is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state.
That is, when the second start memory number is a specific number (here, 1) at the start of the special figure variation display game in the short time state, as a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. The common variation (reach presence / absence common) which is a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected with a high probability from a plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times. Further, in the short time state, when the start memory is larger than a specific number (here, 1) at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is not determined during the normal game state from a plurality of types of variation patterns. The variation pattern with the shortest variation time (here, the variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds) is selected with high probability. As a result, the start-up memory is quickly digested to prevent overflow. If it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result even in the short time state, the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of start memories, and the common variation is not selected.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (step A318) in the above-described special figure routine process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 70, in the change start information setting process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first clears the random number save areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A401).
Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A402), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A403).
Next, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A404), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A405).

Next, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A406), and the added value is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A407).
Next, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is calculated and prepared (step A408), and the second half variation number is prepared as a variation command (ACTION) (step A409), and command setting processing is performed (step A409). Step A410).

Next, a symbol information command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area (step A411), and command setting processing is performed (step A412).
Next, a decoration special figure holding number command (MODE) corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A413), the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A414), and the variation symbol discrimination is performed. The special figure hold count corresponding to the flag is updated by -1 (step A415).
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A416), and command setting processing is performed (step A417).
Next, the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is shifted (step A418), the shifted empty area is cleared to 0 (step A419), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game including information regarding the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set and transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. At the time of prior determination, the value of the variation pattern random number 1 is transmitted as it is to the effect control device 300, but at the start of variation, the game control device 100 determines a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number, and the variation pattern information after the determination ( Number) is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described.
As described above, the effect control device 300 includes the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311.
The control process by the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 mainly includes a 1st main process shown in FIG. 71 and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 72 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 2 milliseconds).

[1st main processing]
First, the 1st main process will be described.
In this 1st main process, as shown in FIG. 71, the process at the start of the program is first performed.
In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step B1), and various initialization processes such as CPU initialization, RAM initial value setting, random number initialization, and the like are performed (step B2). Then, various interrupt timers are started (step B3), and interrupts are permitted (step B4).

In this 1st main process, a loop process is performed as a main loop process.
In the loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B5), and the effect button input process (step B6) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. Do.
Next, a game control command analysis process (step B7) is performed. In this game control command analysis process, it is determined whether or not a command related to a game transmitted from the game control device 100 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and a scene control process to be described later is performed. Process to classify commands for

  Next, a test mode process (step B8) which is a process related to a test mode for testing the display device 41, the decoration device, the rendering device, and the like is performed. When the test mode is set to the test mode, the subsequent game processing is not performed. However, in the test mode, when performing display on the display device 41, output of sound from the speaker, light emission of the LED of the decoration device, operation of the effect device, etc., processing for controlling these (steps B11 to B13 described later) ) Is controlled. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine 10 is powered off.

Next, a 1st scene control process (step B9) related to the control of game effects is performed.
Next, an effect command editing process (step B10) for editing a command output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 is performed.
Next, a sound control process (step B11) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step B12) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. ), Motor / SOL control processing (step B13) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 is performed.
Next, a random number update process (step B14) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step B5).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing will be described.
In this interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 72, first, a timer update process (step B21) for updating a soft timer managed by a program is performed.
Next, an input process (step B22) for processing a signal input to the effect control device 300 and an output process (step B23) for processing a signal output from the effect control device 300 are performed.
Next, a main command reception process (step B24) for receiving a command related to a game transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 is performed, and the interrupt process is terminated.

[2nd main processing]
The video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 of the effect control device 300 performs a 2nd main process shown in FIG.
In the 2nd main process, as shown in FIG. 73, the process at the start of the program is first performed.
As a process at the time of starting the program, first, a CPU initialization process for initializing the CPU (step C1) is performed, the RAM is cleared to 0 (step C2), and an initial value of the RAM is set (step C3).
Next, VDP initialization processing (step C4) for initializing the VDP 313 is performed, and various interrupts are permitted (step C5).
Next, initialization processing of various control processes (step C6) is performed, and screen drawing is permitted (step C7).

In the 2nd main process, a loop process is performed as the main loop process.
In the loop processing, first, the system cycle wait flag is cleared (step C8), and it is determined whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step C9). The system cycle is a cycle for switching between two buffers for temporarily storing image data. When the switching is enabled, the system cycle flag is “1”.
Until the system cycle wait flag becomes 1, the determination whether the system cycle wait flag is 1 is repeated (step C9). When the system cycle wait flag becomes 1 (step C9; Yes), WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C10).

Next, a received command check process (step C11) is performed. In this received command check process, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and the 2nd scene control process is performed. Process to classify commands for
Next, a 2nd scene control process (step C12) for determining display contents is performed based on the received command. In this 2nd scene control process, a notice character or the like or a display priority order is set, and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, background processing (step C13) for setting the background is performed. In this background process, a process of displaying a background according to the gaming state (whether there is a probability state or a waiting state for customers), the gaming mode, the production mode, the reach scene, and the like is performed.
Subsequently, a variation display process (step C14) which is a display control process related to the variation of the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the display device is interlocked with the display of the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display. The hold display process (step C15) for setting the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on 41 is performed. In the hold display processing, processing related to display of a pre-effect (pre-reading effect) that changes the display mode of the decoration special-purpose start memory display is also performed based on the pre-effect information stored in the start storage area.

Next, a customer waiting demo process (step C16) regarding the display of the customer waiting demo is performed. In this customer waiting demonstration process, processing relating to setting of a customer waiting screen for displaying characters, videos, etc., processing relating to setting of notification display to be displayed on the customer waiting screen, and the like are performed.
Next, the ROM data is transferred to the buffer set in the RAM, the display system process (step C17) for performing the actual display process is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the system cycle wait flag (step C8).

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process (step B9) in the 1st main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 74, in the 1st scene control process, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the test mode (step B31).
If it is determined in step B31 that the test mode is being executed (step B31; Yes), the 1st scene control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B31 that the test mode is not in effect (step B31; No), it is determined whether a scene change command has been received (step B32). This scene change command includes various commands relating to games transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (power-on command, power failure recovery command, customer waiting demo command, variation pattern command, symbol stop command, jackpot fanfare command, N-th open command, interval command, etc.).

If it is determined in step B32 that a scene change command has been received (step B32; Yes), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step B33), and the current scene change command received is received. It is determined whether or not the game state is valid, that is, whether or not the command is valid (step B34).
If it is determined in step B34 that the command is valid (step B34; Yes), the received command is saved (step B35), an effect request flag is set (step B36), and the command identifier of the received command Branch processing (step B37) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B32 that the scene change command has not been received (step B32; No), or if it is determined that the command is not valid in step B34 (step B34; No), the command of the received command Branch processing based on the identifier (step B37) is performed. In this case, a branch is performed based on the identifier of the command that was most recently valid.

In the branch process based on the command identifier (step B37), a process to be executed is selected based on the received command.
When a power-on command is received, a power-on process (step B38) for performing a process necessary when the power is turned on is performed.
When a power failure recovery command is received, a power failure recovery (other than waiting for a customer) process (step B39) for performing processing necessary at the time of power failure recovery is performed.
When a customer waiting demo command is received, a customer waiting process (step B40) for performing processing related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, a variation processing (step B41) is performed in which processing relating to the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed. In the changing process, information necessary to play the decorative special figure changing display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure variation display game, for example, production based on information included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, variation pattern information, etc.) (Variation pattern, variation time, etc.) are set.

When a symbol stop command is received, a symbol stop process (step B42), which is a process of stopping the variation display of the identification information in the decorative special symbol variation display game and displaying the result mode, is performed. In the symbol stop process, the stop display time of the result in the decorative special symbol variation display game is set.
If a fanfare command is received, a big hit fanfare process (step B43), which is a process related to the start of the special game state, is performed.
In addition, when the big-open-release n-th command is received, a big hit round process (step B44), which is a process related to the round game, is performed.
When an interval command is received, a big hit interval process (step B45), which is a process related to the interval between rounds, is performed.
When an ending command is received, a big hit ending process (step B46), which is a process related to the end of the special gaming state, is performed.

After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process based on the command identifier (step B37), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed.
As this process, first, a hold number command reception process (step B47) is performed to perform processing based on a hold number command (special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command) including information on increase / decrease of startup memory. A decoration special figure command reception process (step B48) is performed for performing a process based on a special decoration figure command including information related to the stop symbol of the figure variation display game.

Next, based on a pre-determination command (symbol information command, variation pattern random number command) including a result of a pre-reading process for predetermining the result of the special symbol variation display game based on the start-up memory before the execution of the special symbol variation display game Pre-determination command reception processing (step B49) for performing processing is performed.
Next, based on a probability information command including information related to the probability state, a probability information command reception process (step B50) is performed in which a corresponding value is internally set and a background command is transmitted to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312. Then, the 1st scene control process ends.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process (step B40) in the first scene control process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the customer waiting process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first enters a customer waiting state and sets a customer waiting start flag that is set until the customer waiting screen is displayed. It is determined whether or not there is (step B101).
If it is determined in step B101 that there is a customer waiting start flag (step B101; Yes), whether or not an effect mode (game mode) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like is being selected, specifically, For example, it is determined whether or not an effect mode selection screen is displayed on the display device 41 or the like (step B105).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B101 that there is no customer waiting start flag (step B101; No), whether or not a customer waiting demo command transmitted from the game control device 100 when the customer waiting state is entered is received. Is determined (step B102).

If it is determined in step B102 that the customer waiting demo command has not been received (step B102; No), the customer waiting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B102 that a customer waiting demo command has been received (step B102; Yes), a customer waiting start timer is set (step B103), and a customer waiting start flag is set (step B104). It is determined whether or not an effect mode (game mode) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is being selected, specifically, for example, whether or not an effect mode selection screen is displayed on the display device 41 or the like ( Step B105).

If it is determined in step B105 that the effect mode (game mode) is being selected (step B105; Yes), the player selects the effect mode (game mode) by operating the selection button (not shown) or the like by the player. It is determined whether or not there has been a mode selection operation (step B107).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B105 that the effect mode (game mode) is not selected (step B105; No), an instruction is given to switch the effect mode (game mode) by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like. Whether or not there has been a mode switching operation (long-pressing operation for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 5 seconds)), specifically, for example, whether or not there has been an operation for instructing the display device 41 or the like to display an effect mode selection screen Is determined (step B106).

If it is determined in step B106 that there has been a mode switching operation (step B106; Yes), for example, an effect mode selection screen is displayed on the display device 41 or the like, and then the effect mode is selected by the player operating the selection button or the like. It is determined whether or not there has been a mode selection operation for selecting (game mode) (step B107).
If it is determined in step B107 that there has been no mode selection operation (step B107; No), whether or not there has been a mode determination operation for determining the effect mode (game mode) by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like. Is determined (step B109).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B107 that there has been a mode selection operation (step B107; Yes), an effect mode (game mode) corresponding to the mode selection operation is displayed on the display device 41 or the like (step B108). Then, it is determined whether or not there has been a mode determination operation for determining the effect mode (game mode) by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like (step B109).

If it is determined in step B109 that there has been a mode determination operation (step B109; Yes), an effect mode (game mode) corresponding to the mode determination operation is set (step B110), and the set effect mode (game) The side effect unit is operated in the side effect unit movable process for operating the side effect unit 900 in correspondence with the mode) (step B111).
When it is determined in step B106 that there is no mode switching operation (step B106; No), or when it is determined in step B109 that there is no mode determination operation (step B109; No), in the side effect unit moving process The process proceeds to the next step without doing anything (step B111).

  Specifically, in the side effect unit moving process, when the set effect mode (game mode) is switched from the second effect mode (second game mode) to the first effect mode (first game mode). Performs the side effect unit moving process (step B111), for example, as shown in FIG. 82A, the side effect unit 900 is concealed by the concealing movable part 942 (the upper second mode object 912 is concealed). The first state to be shielded is converted, and a pattern for identifying the first effect mode (first game mode) is displayed on the light emitting effect device 610 (in this embodiment, the word “empire”). The background image displayed on the display device 41 is switched to the first mode background image (imperial mode background image), and the symbol displayed on the display device 41 is switched to the first mode symbol (empire symbol).

  Further, when the set effect mode (game mode) is switched from the first effect mode (first game mode) to the second effect mode (second game mode), the side effect unit movable process (step B111). 82), the side effect unit 900 is converted to the second state in which the lower first mode object 911 is concealed (shielded) by the concealment movable unit 942, and as shown in FIG. The device 610 displays a pattern for identifying the second performance mode (second game mode) (in the case of this embodiment, letters “Alliance”). Also, the background image displayed on the display device 41 is switched to the second mode background image (alliance mode background image), and the symbol displayed on the display device 41 is switched to the second mode symbol (confederation symbol).

Next, it is checked whether the customer waiting start timer has expired (step B112), and it is determined whether the customer waiting start timer has expired (step B113).
If it is determined in step B113 that the customer waiting start timer has not expired (step B113; No), the customer waiting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the customer waiting start timer has expired (step B113; Yes), a customer waiting demo setting process for setting the type, layout, etc. of the notification display information displayed on the customer waiting screen is performed. (Step B114), the customer waiting start flag is reset (step B115), and the customer waiting process is terminated.

If a start winning ball is detected before the mode confirmation operation for confirming the effect mode (game mode) is executed, the effect mode (game mode) selected at that time is set. It is also possible to take over the previous setting (the setting before the mode switching operation) as it is.
In the present embodiment, the side effect unit movable process (step B111) is performed in the customer waiting process, that is, the side effect unit 900 is operated while in the customer waiting state. For example, while the player is in a waiting state, an effect mode (game mode) is set according to the player's operation (mode confirmation operation) of the effect button 25, etc., and then the setting is triggered when the change starts It is also possible to configure the side effect unit 900 to operate in correspondence with the existing effect mode (game mode).

In the present embodiment, the effect mode (game mode) switching process (steps B105 to B110) is performed in the customer waiting process, that is, the effect mode (game mode) is switched while in the customer waiting state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to configure the effect mode to be switched during the execution of the variable display game.
In that case, the side effect unit 900 may be operated during the variable display game that was executed when the effect mode was switched, or after the variable display game that was executed when the effect mode was switched. It may be operated at the start of the variable display game.
In this case, the variation effect pattern (described later) may be switched during the variation display game executed when the effect mode is switched, or after the variation display game executed when the effect mode is switched. It may be switched at the start of the variable display game to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode (game mode) is switched according to the player's operation of the effect button 25 or the like (mode confirmation operation). However, the present embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure to switch the effect mode (game mode). That is, for example, it is possible to switch the effect mode (game mode) according to the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game, or the probability state of the general figure variation display game. It is also possible to configure so that the effect mode (game mode) is switched according to (ordinary low probability state or normal high probability state).

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step B41) in the first scene control process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the changing process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B201). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received. When there is this flag, processing based on the received command is performed.

If it is determined in step B201 that there is an effect request flag (step B201; Yes), PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step B202), and the movable body request set process (step B203). I do.
Next, the second effect mode selection table (see the lower part of FIG. 77) is set (step B204), and it is determined whether or not the first effect mode (first game mode) is set (step B205).

When it is determined in step B205 that the first effect mode (first game mode) is not set (step B205; No), that is, when the second effect mode (second game mode) is set. The variation effect pattern setting for setting the details of the variation effect pattern based on the variation start command (the symbol information command and the variation pattern command) from the game control device 100 with reference to the set second effect mode selection table. Processing (step B207) is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B205 that the first effect mode (first game mode) is set (step B205; Yes), the second effect mode selection table set in step B204 is used. A first effect mode selection table (see the upper part of FIG. 77) is set (step B206). And the variation production pattern which sets the detail of a variation production pattern based on the variation start command (a symbol information command and a variation pattern command) from the game control device 100 with reference to the set selection table for the first production mode A setting process (step B207) is performed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 77, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the first effect mode (first game mode) and the change effect pattern corresponding to the second effect mode (second game mode) are The number of types is different.
In the present embodiment, the variation effect pattern is changed between when the first effect mode (first game mode) is set and when the second effect mode (second game mode) is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the first effect mode (first game mode) is set and when the second effect mode (second game mode) is set, the change screen It is also possible to configure to change only the background.

  In addition, as described above, it is possible to configure the effect mode (game mode) according to the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game, but in this case, for example, The first effect mode (first game mode) is set during the normal probability state, and the second effect mode (second game mode) is set during the high probability state. If it is configured to use a selection table that has more types of variation effect patterns corresponding to the first effect mode than the variation effect patterns corresponding to the second effect mode, there are more various variation effect patterns in the normal probability state. It is possible to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Next, an accessory action pattern setting process (step B208) and a random number seed initialization process (step B209) are performed to set a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B210). The scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display and the display of the effect character in the decoration special figure variable display game. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table.
Next, a variation time setting process (step B211) for setting the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and the first scene and the scene update timer are set (step B212). Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step B213), and the changing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step B201 that there is no production request flag (step B201; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step B214). The scene update timer measures the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and the value of this scene update timer being 0 indicates that the scene being executed has ended.
If it is determined in step B214 that the value of the scene update timer is not 0 (step B214; No), the process proceeds to step B211.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B214 that the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step B214; Yes), the next normal scene data is set (step B215). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the scene update timer.

Next, a linear light emitting unit control process (step B216) is performed to control the linear light emitting unit 500 based on the linear light emitting unit effect information among the accessory operating patterns set in the accessory operating pattern setting process (step B208). Then, it is determined whether or not it is an accessory operation timing (step B217).
If it is determined in step B217 that it is not an accessory operation timing (step B217; No), the process proceeds to step B211.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B217 that it is an accessory operation timing (step B217; Yes), effect unit operation mode information among the accessory operation patterns set in the accessory operation pattern setting process (step B208). Then, an accessory operation control process (step B218) for controlling the action of the accessory is performed, and the process proceeds to step B211.

[Function action pattern setting process]
Next, details of the accessory action pattern setting process (step B208) in the above-described changing process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 78, in the accessory action pattern setting process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first prepares an accessory action selection table (see FIG. 79) (step B221). Then, a value (an accessory action pattern) corresponding to the change start command (symbol information command and change pattern command) from the game control device 100 is acquired (step B222). Then, the acquired accessory action pattern (effect unit action mode information and linear light emitting part effect information) is set (step B223), and the accessory action pattern setting process is terminated.

For example, when “non-operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information, the control for operating the accessory is not performed in the accessory operation control process (see step B218 in FIG. 77) of the changing process.
Further, for example, when “lower effect unit operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information, the lower movable unit 830 of the lower effect unit 800 in the accessory operation control process (see step B218 in FIG. 77) in the changing process. Control to operate is performed. Thereby, for example, the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 convert from a shielding state in which the transmissive light emitting unit 831g is shielded to an exposed state in which the transmissive light emitting unit 831g is exposed.

Further, for example, when “shutter effect unit operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information, the display unit partition effect unit 440 is operated in the accessory operation control process (see step B218 in FIG. 77) during the process of changing. Control is performed. Thereby, for example, the movable partition members 48 </ b> A and 48 </ b> B convert from a state where the display area R of the display device 41 is not partitioned to a state where the display area R is partitioned.
Further, for example, when “lower part / shutter effect unit operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information, the lower effect unit 800 can be moved downward in the changing object operation control process (see step B218 in FIG. 77). Control for operating the unit 830 and the display unit partition effect unit 440 is performed.

In addition, for example, when “side effect unit operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information, the side portion of the side effect unit 900 in the accessory operation control process (see step B218 in FIG. 77) in the changing process. Control for operating the movable unit 940 is performed.
Here, as a control for operating the side movable unit 940, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, the side effect unit 900 is concealed by the concealing movable unit 942 from the first mode object 911 and the second mode object 912. Without being converted to a third state that covers a part of the display region R of the display device 41 (a state positioned beside the light emitting effect device 610), and then the concealing movable portion 942 is operated to expand the diameter.

In addition, when the position of the concealment movable part 942 in the case where the side effect unit 900 is in the third state is referred to as a specific operation position, each linear light-emitting unit 500 spreads radially from the specific operation position as shown in FIG. It is provided along the line.
The movable effect unit (side effect unit 900) can be converted into a third state that is located in front of the image display device (display device 41) and covers a part of the display region R, and conversion control means (effect control device). 300) is movable when the variable display game being executed on the image display device (display device 41) satisfies predetermined specific conditions (in the case of the present embodiment, the reach system is SP3 reach or SP4 reach). The effect unit (side effect unit 900) is configured to convert to the third state.

For example, when “none” is set as the linear light emitting unit effect information, the linear light emitting unit 500 is controlled to emit light in the linear light emitting unit control process (step B216) of the changing process (see FIG. 77). I will not.
Further, for example, when “white”, “blue”, or “red” is set as the linear light emitting unit effect information, the linear light emitting unit control process (see step B216 in FIG. 77) in the changing process performs linear processing. Control for causing the light emitting unit 500 to emit white, blue or red light is performed.
Further, for example, when “rainbow” is set as the linear light emitting unit effect information, the linear light emitting unit 500 emits a rainbow color in the changing linear light emitting unit control process (see step B216 in FIG. 77). Control is performed.

  In this embodiment, “side effect unit special operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information, and “rainbow” is set as the linear light emitting effect information of the SP4 reach, which is the reach effect for determining the big hit. Only if. On the other hand, in the case of SP3 reach, even if “side effect unit special operation” is set as effect unit operation mode information, colors other than “rainbow” (in the case of this embodiment, “Red”) is set. Therefore, when “side effect unit special operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information and “rainbow” is set as the linear light emitting unit effect information, the effect control device 300 notifies the jackpot confirmation with one notification As an effect, a line effect that displays the line L on the display device 41 so as to have continuity with the linear light emitting unit 500 is executed.

  Specifically, when “side effect unit special operation” is set as the effect unit operation mode information and “rainbow” is set as the linear light emitting unit effect information, for example, as shown in FIG. While the production unit 900 converts to the third state, the concealment movable unit 942 performs a diameter expanding operation, and each linear light emitting unit 500 emits light in rainbow colors. In addition, as a line effect, a rainbow-colored line (line L) that spreads radially from the specific operation position so as to be continuous with each linear light emitting unit 500 is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, a sound for notifying the jackpot decision is output from the speakers 19a and 19b (in the case of this embodiment, “cue cure!”).

  On the other hand, when “side effect unit special operation” is set as the effect operation mode information and a color other than “rainbow” is set as the linear light emitting effect information, for example, as shown in FIG. While the unit 900 is converted to the third state, the concealing movable unit 942 performs a diameter expanding operation, and each linear light emitting unit 500 emits light. However, the line operation, that is, the specific operation so as to continue to each linear light emitting unit 500 The display of the line (line L) extending radially from the position is not executed. Further, from the speakers 19a and 19b, a sound other than the sound for notifying the big hit confirmation (in the case of the present embodiment, “Puss!”) Is output.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, “side effect unit special operation” may be set not only when the reach system is SP4 reach but also when the reach system is SP3 reach. It is also possible to configure so that “side effect unit special operation” is set only when is SP4 reach. Further, when a color other than “rainbow” is set as the side effect information and “side effect unit special operation” is set as the effect operation mode information, no sound may be output.

[Preliminary judgment command reception processing]
Next, details of the advance determination command reception process (step B49) in the first scene control process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 80, in the prior determination command receiving process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not a prior determination command (symbol information command, variation pattern random number command) has been received. Determination is made (step B301).
If it is determined in step B301 that the advance determination command has not been received (step B301; No), the advance determination command reception process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B301 that a prior determination command has been received (step B301; Yes), the content of the received prior determination command is saved in the corresponding hold (start) storage area (step B302).
Next, it is checked whether or not the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is missing symbol information (step B303), and it is determined whether or not the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is missing symbol information. Determination is made (step B304).

If it is determined in step B304 that the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is out of symbol information (step B304; Yes), the variation group selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 68, FIG. 69) (step B305), and a reach system corresponding to the variation pattern random number command included in the received advance determination command is acquired from the prepared variation group selection table (step B307).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B304 that the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is not out of symbol information (step B304; No), that is, the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is the jackpot symbol information. If it is, prepare a variation group selection table (see FIG. 67) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (step B306), and receive from the prepared fluctuation group selection table A reach system corresponding to the variation pattern random number command included in the prior determination command is acquired (step B307).

Next, the prior effect distribution table (see FIG. 81) is set (step B308), and the prior effect notification mode is based on the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command and the reach system acquired in step B307. Is selected (step B309).
Next, the pre-production information related to the selected pre-production notification mode or the like is saved in the target hold (start) storage area (step B310), and the pre-determination command reception process is terminated.
Here, for example, when “pending: no change” is selected as the notification mode of the pre-effect, a special color drawing start storage display of a default color (white in the present embodiment) is displayed on the display device 41. .
In addition, for example, when “hold: blue”, “hold: yellow”, “hold: red” or “hold: rainbow” is selected as the notification mode of the pre-effect, the decoration feature of blue, yellow, red or rainbow color is selected. The figure start memory display is displayed on the display device 41.

In the present embodiment, the decoration special figure start memory display color displayed on the display device 41 is changed according to the prefetching result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure start memory display color is changed. In addition to (or in place of) the change, the effect mode (game mode) is changed according to the look-ahead result, and the state of the side effect unit 900 is changed accordingly (specifically, the concealment movable unit 942 It is also possible to configure to change the position).
Further, in the present embodiment, the concealment movable unit 942 is configured to operate to expand the diameter only when the side effect unit 900 is in the third state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the side effect unit 900 It is also possible to configure the concealing movable portion 942 to perform a diameter expansion operation when the state becomes the first state or the second state.

Here, as described above, the partition member 602 is formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light. The stage 601 is also formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light, and the front surface of the stage 601 is a decorative member 601a configured not to transmit light (or to hardly transmit light). Covered.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), even when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state (that is, a state before the lower movable unit 830 is lifted), the rear of the stage 601. The upper part of the lower movable unit 830 disposed in the upper part can be visually recognized through the partition member 602 and the lower end part of the lower movable unit 830 is visually recognized through the rear surface part of the stage 601 and the guide outlet 603b. be able to. That is, even when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state, the entire lower movable unit 830 can be seen.

Further, as described above, even if the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in a shielded state, the exposed light emitting portion 831i is exposed from the gap between the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836. The inside of the guide channel 603 can be illuminated by the light transmitted through the rear wall portion 602b of the partition member 602 and the rear surface portion of the stage 601.
For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), a first memory display area M1 in which a decorative special figure start memory display representing the first start memory number appears is provided on the lower left side of the display area R of the display device 41. At the same time, by providing the second memory display area M2 in which the decorative special figure start memory display indicating the second start memory number appears on the lower right side of the display area of the display device 41, the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are provided. In the shielding state, the first storage display area M1 and the second storage display area M2 can be partitioned by the projected upper end of the lower movable unit 830.

When the lower movable unit 830 is raised and the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are exposed, almost the entire exposed light emitting portion 831i of the lower movable unit 830 is removed from the stage 601 as shown in FIG. 86 (b). Is also located on the upper side. Therefore, if the first storage display area M1 and the second storage display area M2 are provided in the lower part of the display area R, the lower movable unit 830 causes the first storage display area when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are exposed. M1 and the second storage display area M2 are concealed. As a result, when the left movable member 835 and the right movable member 836 are in the exposed state, the start memory number is unknown, so that it is possible to prevent stopping.
In FIG. 86 (a), the first storage display area M1 and the second storage display area M2 can be identified by display, but the first storage display area M1 and the second storage display area M2 are integrated. In other words, the first storage display area M1 and the second storage display area M2 may be partitioned by the projected upper end of the lower movable unit 830.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a detailed configuration and function of the collective display device 50 used in the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 87, the collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit for a first special figure fluctuation display game (variable display of special symbols composed of 7-segment type indicators (LEDs) and the like). Hereinafter, a special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure fluctuation display section (hereinafter, special figure 2 display) 52 for the second special figure fluctuation display game are provided. Among these, the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 is started based on the occurrence of the start memory by winning the game ball in the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) or by changing winning. The second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52 is started based on the occurrence of the start memory due to the winning of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting prize opening) or the winning in the fluctuation. Is done. However, the reverse may be possible.
The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 shown in FIG. 87 are 7-segment LEDs, but may have a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs or filament lamps are arranged. .

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes storage display units 53 to 55 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game composed of four or two LED lamps, and a general display composed of one LED lamp. There is provided a fluctuation display section (common figure display) 56 for a figure fluctuation display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 is composed of three LED lamps, a round display unit 57 that displays the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable prize-winning device 38), and is composed of two LED lamps. And a game state display unit (game state display) 58 for notifying the occurrence of a probability state when the power is turned on.
In addition, a connection terminal portion 59 for electrically connecting to the output portion 130 of the game control device 100 is provided on a substrate on which the above-described indicators and lamps of the collective display device 50 are mounted (hereinafter referred to as a special figure substrate). ing.

The special figure 1 hold display 53 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. Specifically, when the number of holdings is “0”, all four lamps are turned off, and when the number of holdings is “1”, one lamp (see “87” in FIG. 87). 1 ”) is turned on. In the figure, the LED in the lit state is painted black. When the number of holds is “2”, as shown in FIG. 88B, two lamps (“1” and “2” in FIG. 87) are turned on, and the number of holds is “3”. 88 (c), the three lamps (“1”, “2” and “3” in FIG. 87) are turned on, and when the number of holdings is “4”, FIG. 88 ( As shown in d), all four lamps ("1" to "4" in FIG. 87) are turned on.
As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (d), the special figure 2 hold indicator 54 is turned on according to the start memory number (holding number) of the normal variable winning device 37, as in the special figure 1 hold indicator 53. Be controlled.

  The general-purpose hold indicator 55 is composed of two LED lamps, and when the number of holds is “1” according to the number of stored start-ups (holding number) of the general-purpose start gate 34, FIG. 90 (a). Thus, one lamp ("1" in FIG. 87) is turned on. When the number of holds is “2”, as shown in FIG. 90B, two lamps (“1” and “2” in FIG. 87) are turned on, and the number of holds is “3”. 90 (c), when one lamp ("1" in FIG. 87) blinks and the other lamp (2) is lit, and the number of holds is "4", As shown in 90 (d), the two lamps (“1” and “2” in FIG. 87) are blinked. In the figure, blinking LEDs are represented by horizontal lines.

  The map display 56 for executing the map change display game is composed of one LED lamp, and during the change, the lamp is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the game result is “out of”, the lamp is turned off as shown in FIG. 91A, for example. When the game result is “win”, the lamp is turned on as shown in FIG. 91B. And display the game results. That is, the lamp is turned off (blank) is the usual figure loss pattern, and the lamp is turned on (dot display) is the figure per figure.

Next, a variation pattern (variation display control) of a variation map display game on the map display 56 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 92, the first variation pattern starts from the display of the symbol next to the stop symbol. In FIG. 92, the uppermost stage is a fluctuation stop state.
In FIG. 92A, since the stop state immediately before the start of fluctuation is “losing” (lamp is extinguished), the fluctuation is repeatedly turned on and off. In FIG. 92 (B), since the stop state immediately before the start of fluctuation is “hit” (lamp lighting), the fluctuation is repeatedly turned off and on.
According to the variation display control according to the first variation pattern, the design changes simultaneously with the start of the variation (the lighting state of the LED changes), so that there is an advantage that the timing at which the variation is started becomes clear.

As shown in FIG. 93, the second variation pattern starts variation with the same symbol at the start regardless of the stop symbol.
In the case of FIG. 93, the fluctuation is started from lighting and is repeatedly turned on and off. Note that the control may be performed so that the change is started from the turn-off and the turn-off / light-on is repeated.
According to the variation display control according to the second variation pattern, when the immediately previous stop state is “losing” (the lamp is extinguished), the symbol changes simultaneously with the variation start (t1) as shown in FIG. When the variation start timing is clear, the symbol immediately before the variation start and the symbol immediately after the variation start are the same as shown in FIG. Therefore, it can be seen that there is no change in the lighting state of the LED in the interval a in the figure, and the fluctuation starts only after the change occurs in the LED in the interval b. In other words, since the times a and b are 200 ms in the present embodiment, it appears that the fluctuation starts at a timing 200 ms later than the actual fluctuation start. However, since the second variation pattern has the same operation during the variation, it is not necessary to check the immediately preceding state and start the variation, and the program can be simplified compared to the control of the first variation pattern. There is an advantage that the storage capacity of the ROM can be reduced.

Next, display control in the round display unit 57 will be described. In the description, the number of jackpot rounds is assumed to be three patterns of 15 rounds, 10 rounds, and 2 rounds.
The round display unit 57 includes three LED lamps 57a, 57b, and 57c. In the variable display game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, a predetermined symbol is stopped and a 15R (15 rounds) jackpot is displayed. When this occurs, the LED lamp 57a is turned on to notify the type of jackpot (15R) as shown in FIG. 95A from the time when the special symbol symbol stops until the point when the jackpot round game ends. Similarly, when a 10R (10 round) jackpot occurs, as shown in FIG. 95B, the LED lamp 57b is turned on to notify the jackpot type (10R). Furthermore, when a 2R (2 round) jackpot occurs, as shown in FIG. 95C, the LED lamp 57c is turned on to notify the jackpot type (2R).

Next, display control in the game state display unit (game state display) 58 will be described.
The game state display unit 58 is composed of two LED lamps 58a and 58b. In the variable display game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, a probable big hit occurs, and a high probability state after the big hit round game is over. If it is determined that the game control device is in a high probability state when the power is turned on for the start of business on the next day, the power is turned off to start business the next day. As in 96 (A), the LED lamp 58a is turned on to notify that it is in a high probability state.
In addition, when a big hit occurs in the variable display game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and the game shifts to the time-saving state after the big hit round game ends, the LED lamp 57b is turned on as shown in FIG. 96 (B), Announcement of the occurrence of a short time condition. It should be noted that the LED lamp 57b for short time notification is not lit even if it is in a short time state when the power is turned on, but it may be lit.

Next, the details of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 will be described.
FIG. 97A shows an example of “design per symbol” in the special symbol variation display game, and FIG. 97B shows an example of “special symbol lose symbol” in the special diagram variation display game. As shown in FIG. 97A, in this embodiment, there are 10 types of stop symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to the illustrated ones, and “A”, “C”, “E”, “F”, “H”, “L”, “P”, “S”, “U”. As described above, a symbol corresponding to a significant symbol that can be displayed by the 7-segment LED (a symbol that may be used on a daily basis, such as an alphabet) may be used as a stop symbol. The “special figure lose symbol” is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 97B (only the central segment g is lit), and may be another symbol.
In addition, in FIG. 97 (B), ag is a code | symbol for specifying a segment.

  FIG. 98 shows an example of a “changing symbol” in the special diagram variation display game. These symbols are displayed only during a change, and are not displayed when stopped. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in this embodiment, the state in which all segments are turned off (blank) is also one of the changing symbols. As shown in FIG. 98, a symbol corresponding to a symbol that is not significant (a symbol that is rarely used on a daily basis) may be used as the symbol during fluctuation. As will be described below, the variable display of the present embodiment is a case where a specific symbol is selected from the “variable symbols” in FIG. 98 and displayed alternately with the stop symbol (FIG. 97 (B)). For example, there may be a case where a plurality of changing symbols such as 6 or 7 are displayed in order.

Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation display control) of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display game using the decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game.
Specifically, when the game control device starts the special figure variation display game, it transmits a variation start command to the effect control device, and the effect control device that receives the variation start command starts the decoration symbol variation display game. . Therefore, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decorative symbol fluctuation display game start to fluctuate synchronously. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game control device stops the special figure variation display game, and the effect control device stops the decoration symbol variation display game. Therefore, the special figure variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are stopped synchronously.
When the game control device stops the special figure variation display game, it sends a variation stop command to the effect control device, receives the variation stop command, and the effect control device stops the decorative symbol variation display game. Also good. However, since the clocks of the game control device and the effect control device are not completely synchronized, and because commands are transmitted and received, the timings for starting and stopping the special figure variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game Some errors will occur, but not enough for the player to perceive. Note that the game control device may directly control the decorative symbol variation display game without using the effect control device.

  In FIG. 99, the uppermost symbol is a symbol displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 before the start of variation, that is, the previous special variation display game. In addition, the middle part of FIG. 99 is a display symbol that is changing, and the bottom part is a stop symbol of the current special figure change display game. In this embodiment, as described above, there are one lost symbol and ten hit symbols. The blank symbol (all segments off) is one of the changing symbols. Therefore, unlike the case of the normal variation display game, in the special variation display game, the game does not end with a blank symbol (all segments turned off).

The first fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 99, “blank design (all segments off)” which is a changing design, and “losing design ( Are displayed alternately. The period is a time (for example, 50 to 500 ms, 200 ms in this embodiment) that allows a normal player to recognize the alternate display and that is shorter than the variation time of the variation display game.
In the first variation pattern, there are a case where the symbol to be displayed at the beginning of the variation is the symbol being varied (blank symbol) and a case where the symbol is a loss symbol. FIG. 100 shows the timing in each case after the suspension of fluctuation with the lost symbol. FIG. 100A shows the timing when the symbol displayed at the beginning of the change is the changing symbol (blank symbol), and FIG. 100B shows the timing when the symbol displayed at the beginning of the change is the loss symbol. It is.

As shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the changing symbol (blank symbol) is displayed at the beginning of the change, the display content always changes at the start timing t1 regardless of the previous change stop symbol. This is advantageous in that the player can easily understand that the game has started, and that the player can easily understand that the game is synchronized with the decorative special figure variation display game executed on the liquid crystal display device 41.
On the other hand, when a lost symbol is displayed at the beginning of the fluctuation start, if the previous fluctuation stop symbol is a winning symbol, the display content may change at the start timing t1, but in the case of a lost symbol, the display is shown in FIG. As described above, since the display contents change slightly after the start timing t1, there is a problem in that the display contents appear to be out of synchronization with the decorative special figure variation display game executed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Regarding the display at the time of stoppage, when the special figure variation display game is won, the display pattern will always change regardless of whether it is displaying the changing symbol (blank symbol) or the lost symbol. Although it is easy to understand, when the special symbol variation display game is lost, if the loss symbol as the stop symbol is displayed after the loss symbol is displayed as the last variable symbol, the end timing becomes difficult to understand. However, the synchronization with the decoration special figure change display game is not so much compared with the start of change. Therefore, in this embodiment, the changing symbol (blank symbol) is displayed at the beginning of the change.
In this embodiment, there are one type of losing symbol (only the center segment g is lit). However, there are two types of losing symbol 1 and losing symbol 2, and the changing display is changing symbol (blank symbol) and losing symbol. You may display in order of the symbol 1 and the loss symbol 2 in order (circulation shift display).

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 101, the second fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is shown in (e) and (g) from among the changing patterns shown in FIG. These two symbols are selected and displayed alternately during fluctuation.
In this variation pattern, since the symbols displayed during the variation do not include the stop symbol, the display of the variation display game is started regardless of the symbol of the stop symbol. There is an advantage that the end timing becomes clear. However, since the stop symbol is not displayed during the change, it is difficult to distinguish whether the symbol is changing or whether a demonstration or the like is being displayed.
In the first variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 99, it can also be seen that the lost symbol as the stop symbol (only the central segment g is lit) is shared as one of the “variable symbols”. In that case, since it can be said that two specific symbols (center horizontal bar symbol and blank symbol) are selected and displayed alternately from a plurality of “varying symbols”, the second variation pattern is This can be regarded as a modification of the first variation pattern.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 102, the third fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, as shown in the middle part of FIG. These six symbols are selected and displayed in order during the change (circular shift display).
Even in this variation pattern, since the symbols displayed during the variation do not include the stop symbol, the display of the variation display game is started at any stop symbol and the display is started at any stop symbol. There is an advantage that the end timing becomes clear. However, since the stop symbol is not displayed during the change, it is difficult to distinguish whether the symbol is changing or whether a demonstration or the like is being displayed.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 103, the fourth variation pattern in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is shown in (c) to (h) from the stop symbols shown in FIG. Six symbols are selected and combined with the lost symbol (only the central segment g is lit) and displayed so as to repeatedly draw the character “8” (circular shift display).
Further, in the fourth variation pattern, a lost symbol (only the segment g is lit) is displayed at the beginning of the variation display game, and then lit in the order of segments cd-e-g-b-af-g. I am doing so. Thereby, since the same fluctuation is performed every time, there is an advantage that there is no sense of incongruity and the program can be simplified. However, in this case, if the previous game was a deviation variation display game, the lost symbol (segment g) is continuously displayed, so that the start timing is difficult to understand. In addition, since the stop symbol is displayed during the fluctuation, it is difficult to distinguish whether the symbol fluctuation is caused by the second fluctuation pattern and the third fluctuation pattern or whether a demonstration or the like is displayed. Does not occur.
In this embodiment, there is one type of lost symbol (only the central segment g is lit), but a plurality of symbols may be used. For example, in FIG. 103, only the segment e of the changing symbol may be turned on in addition to the lost symbol, and two types of lost symbols may be provided.

The fifth variation pattern avoids the above problem.
In the fifth variation pattern, the symbols used during variation and the lighting order of the segments during variation are the same as the fourth variation pattern in FIG. 103, but the symbols displayed at the beginning of the variation display game are different. That is, as shown in the middle of FIG. 104, when the previous game stop symbol is a winning symbol, the segment g, that is, the losing symbol is displayed at the beginning of the fluctuation start, and the previous game stop symbol is the losing symbol (in the middle). In the case of only the segment g being lit), at the beginning of the change, the segment c, which is the lower right vertical bar, which is the changing symbol displayed next to the lost symbol during the change, is displayed.
In this variation pattern, the first symbol to be displayed differs depending on the type of the last stop symbol, so the program is slightly more complicated than in the case of the fourth variation pattern. In this embodiment, the display of the symbol change) is displayed, and since the display during the symbol change starts from that symbol, there is no sense of incongruity, and the display symbol changes at the start of the change, so there is an advantage that the start timing of the variable display game becomes clear. .
In this embodiment, there is one type of lost symbol (only the central segment g is lit), but a plurality of symbols may be used. For example, in FIG. 103, only the segment e of the changing symbol may be turned on in addition to the lost symbol, and two types of lost symbols may be provided.

The sixth variation pattern in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is that the symbols and the variation order used during the variation of the variation display game with the short variation time are changed in the variation display game with the long variation time. It is designed to be different from the symbols and variation order used.
Specifically, the symbols used in the variation display game with a long variation time and the variation order are the same as those shown in the middle part of FIG. On the other hand, the symbols used during the variation of the variation display game with a short variation time are (c), (d), (e) among the stopped symbols shown in FIG. 98, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 3 symbols (segments c, d, e lit) are selected and combined with the lost symbol (only the center segment g is lit), and the “o” character is displayed repeatedly (circular shift display). Is.

In this way, by reducing the types of symbols used during fluctuations in a fluctuation display game with a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shorten the time required to display each symbol as a whole. The display can be made suitable for a display having a short variation time. In addition, it is possible to avoid the game from being stopped and the symbol being stopped before the change is completed.
In FIG. 105, as in FIG. 104, the segment to be displayed at the beginning of the change is different depending on whether the stop symbol of the previous variation display game is a lost symbol or a winning symbol. Like the variation pattern in FIG. 103, the same symbol (losing symbol) may be used in both cases where the stop symbol of the previous variation display game is a losing symbol (only the center segment g is lit) and a winning symbol. .
In FIG. 105, the number of symbols used during the change is four, but it may be six or two. And one of them may or may not contain a lost symbol.

FIG. 106 shows a modification of the sixth variation pattern. In this modification, the symbol used during the variation of the variation display game with a short variation time is set to “o” in FIG. 98 (b), and the shift display is stopped, and this symbol and the variation symbol (blank symbol) Are displayed alternately. The symbols used in the variation display game with a long variation time and the variation order may be the same as those in FIG. 103 or 104. The variation pattern in the case of short-term variation in this modification is a short-term variation because the symbols displayed during the variation are different from the long variation display game, and the display method is also different between the cyclic shift display and the alternate display. There is an advantage that it is easy to understand.
In addition, for fluctuation display games with short fluctuation times, in addition to shortening the fluctuation time due to the high probability due to the probability fluctuation, there is a function to shorten the fluctuation time due to the increase in reserved memory and the function of extending the opening of ordinary electric accessories. Including the shortening of the fluctuation time, the reduction of the number of symbols during the fluctuation and the change of the fluctuation order do not necessarily indicate a high probability state.

From the above description, in the above embodiment,
A special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display 51, special symbol 2 indicator 52) for displaying special symbols;
A decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 41) for displaying a decorative symbol;
Control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game for variably displaying a special symbol on the special symbol display device and variably displaying a decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device;
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (so-called jackpot) advantageous to a player when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device,
The control means includes
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined condition, when the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display device is started, the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device is also started to display the variable symbol and the special symbol display device during the variable display is displayed. When stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the above, the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device during the variable display is also stopped.
In the variation display of the special symbol, the lost symbol and the symbol that is different from the winning symbol and the lost symbol and that is not displayed in a suspended manner are repeatedly displayed alternately.
It can be understood that the invention of starting the display of the changing symbol is included when the special symbol changing display is started.

Here, the “control means” may be configured such that the control device for controlling the special symbol display device and the control device for controlling the decorative symbol display device are configured separately, or the special symbol display device and the decorative symbol display device are provided. You may be comprised with one control apparatus which can be controlled. The “special game state” means a so-called jackpot state in which, for example, a cycle game in which a variable winning device is opened a plurality of times is executed. The “predetermined condition” means an inflow of a game ball to the start opening, a start memory that occurs during a variable display game, and the like.
According to the invention as described above, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the display starts from the fluctuating symbol, so that the special symbol fluctuates without any sense of incongruity without impairing the effect of the decorative symbol display by the decorative symbol display device. It can be executed and the player is not shy away from the game. In addition, when the previous stop symbol of the variation display game is a winning symbol or a lost symbol, a different symbol (a symbol during variation) is first displayed at the start of variation, so that it is easy to understand that the variation has started.

In the above embodiment,
A special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display 51, special symbol 2 indicator 52) for displaying special symbols;
A decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 41) for displaying a decorative symbol;
Control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game for variably displaying a special symbol on the special symbol display device and variably displaying a decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device;
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (so-called jackpot) advantageous to a player when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device,
The control means includes
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined condition, when the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display device is started, the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device is also started to display the variable symbol and the special symbol display device during the variable display is displayed. When stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the above, the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device during the variable display is also stopped.
In the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the lost symbol and a plurality of changing symbols that are different from the winning symbol and are not displayed in a stopped manner are sequentially displayed.
When the variable symbol display is started after the winning symbol is stopped, and when the special symbol variable symbol is stopped after the stop symbol is different from the winning symbol. The invention is such that the changing symbol displayed next to the displayed symbol is the same.

Here, the “changing symbol” may be the same symbol as the lost symbol or may be a different symbol.
According to this invention, when the special symbol starts to change, the same changing symbol is displayed next to the stop-displayed symbol, so that it fluctuates, so that there is no sense of incongruity without impairing the effect of the decorative symbol display by the decorative symbol display device. It is possible to execute special symbol variations without any game, and the player is not shy away from the game. Also, if the changing symbol to be displayed immediately after the start of variation is different from the lost symbol, whether the previous stop symbol of the variable display game is a winning symbol or a lost symbol, the first symbol that is different at the beginning of the variation (the changing symbol) ) Is displayed, it is easy to understand that the fluctuation has started. On the other hand, if the changing symbol displayed immediately after the start of the variation is the same symbol as the lost symbol, the program can be simplified and the storage capacity of the ROM storing the program can be reduced.

In the above embodiment,
A special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display 51, special symbol 2 indicator 52) for displaying special symbols;
A decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 41) for displaying a decorative symbol;
Control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game for variably displaying a special symbol on the special symbol display device and variably displaying a decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device;
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (so-called jackpot) advantageous to a player when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device,
The control means includes
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined condition, when the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display device is started, the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device is also started to display the variable symbol and the special symbol display device during the variable display is displayed. When stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the above, the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device during the variable display is also stopped.
In the variation display of the special symbol, the lost symbol and a plurality of varying symbols that are different from the winning symbol and the lost symbol and are not displayed in a stopped manner are displayed in order.
When starting the variation display of the special symbol after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation symbol is displayed next to the winning symbol that is stopped and displayed,
When starting the change display of the special symbol after the losing symbol is stopped, the invention includes the invention in which the changing symbol is displayed next to the losing symbol that is stopped and displayed. It is.

  According to this invention, when the special symbol starts to change, the design always changes, so that it can be shown that the change starts in synchronization with the decorative design. In addition, since the same change is made every time the change symbol is displayed after the loss symbol is displayed, the change of the special symbol that does not give a sense of incongruity without impairing the effect using the decorative symbol display by the decorative symbol display device Can be executed and the player is not shy away from the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the variation display game has a plurality of variation times, and the variation display game with a short variation time is more varied than the variation display game with a variation time longer than the short variation time. Also included are inventions in which the variation of symbols is performed using a few types of varying symbols.
According to this invention, by changing the number of the changing symbols between the long change time and the short change time, it is possible to display the change in the symbols according to the change time.

Further, the above embodiment includes an invention in which a lost symbol and a changing symbol are displayed alternately in the case of a short fluctuation time.
According to this invention, by changing the variation method between the long variation time and the short variation time, the symbol variation according to the variation time can be performed, and the variation display during the execution is also long whether the game is a short variation. It is possible to make it easy for the player to understand whether the time is changing.

Although the invention made by the present inventor has been specifically described based on the embodiments, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the special figure display units 51 and 52 for executing the original special figure fluctuation display game are provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 41 for executing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. You may comprise so that only one special figure indicator may be provided.
Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. It can also be applied to slot machines.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, mainly. Different parts will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine 10 including a gaming board 30 in which a gaming nail 80 is implanted on a synthetic resin gaming board 30a, and is a gaming nail 80 that is implanted immediately above a winning opening. There is a life nail 81 and a guard nail 81 which is a game nail with which the fired game ball first collides among the game nails 80, and the pilot hole 90 for driving the game nail 80 formed on the game board 30a. The size is different. In this embodiment, planting the game nail 80 on the game board 30a is referred to as “driving”. However, this is a conventional expression, and not only is it thrown in, but pressure is applied (press-fit). Etc. are also included.

  The game board 30 shown in FIG. 107 is configured by attaching various members to a game board 30a made of synthetic resin. As shown in FIG. 107, in the game board 30 of the present embodiment, a second special variation winning device 39 is provided below the first special variation winning device 38. The second special variable winning device 39 has the same configuration as the first special variable winning device 38, and when driven by a large winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 55) as a driving device, the upper end side falls to the near side. An attacker-type open / close door 39c that can be opened by rotating in the direction, and a state in which the big prize opening is closed depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game (blocking state unfavorable for the player) ) To an open state (a state advantageous to the player).

  Further, the normal variation winning device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the surrounding frame body 40. The normal variation winning device 37 has a configuration similar to that of the second special variation winning device 39 in the first embodiment, and the blade-shaped movable member that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left side. 37b, which is normally closed to prevent the inflow of game balls (blocked state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is rotated in the direction of falling to the left side by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 55) as the drive device, and the normal variation The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball can flow.

  A guard nail 82 in the game board 30 shown in FIG. 107 is a game nail 80 planted at a position above the game area 32 and at the upper left of the surrounding frame body 40. The game ball is launched from a launching device disposed below the game board 30 and passes between the guide rail 31 and the inner rail 31a disposed along the guide rail 31 and is positioned above the game area 32. It is guided to the outflow part 31b. In other words, the game ball is launched from one side of the game board 30 toward the upper side of the game area 32 formed on the front surface of the game board 30. Then, as shown in FIG. 108, the game ball that has flowed out from the outflow portion 31 b first collides with the guard nail 82 in the game nail 80.

  The guard nail 82 is planted so that a plurality of game nails 80 are arranged in a row. The planting direction of the guard nail 82, that is, the direction of a straight line connecting the adjacent guard nails 82, and the game ball with respect to the guard nail 82 The direction of travel (the direction of travel when colliding with the guard nail 82) is substantially perpendicular. In particular, the guard nails 82 located on the right side of the normal variation winning device 37 are planted in a connected manner at intervals equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the planting direction (joining direction) of the guard nails 82 is as follows. The moving direction of the game ball with respect to the guard nail 82 is made to be substantially perpendicular. As described above, by setting the planting direction (joining direction) of the guard nail 82 to be substantially perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball with respect to the guard nail 82, it is possible to receive the launched game ball and directly collide with the game ball. While preventing the surrounding frame body 40 from being damaged, it can be guided mainly to flow down the left side of the surrounding frame body 40. Since the strongest impact among the game nails 80 implanted in the game board 30 is repeatedly applied to such a guard nail 82, a large burden is placed on the planted portion of the guard nail 82 in the game board 30a. .

  A game board 30 shown in FIG. 109 is provided with a second special variation winning device 39 and a general winning opening 35 in the game area 32 on the right side of the surrounding frame body 40, and the game area 32 according to the game situation. The game ball is fired (so-called right-handed) to the other side (here, the right side) opposite to the side where the game ball is fired (here, the left side). Although not shown, a guard nail 82 is also planted at the upper left position of the surrounding frame body 40 in the same manner as the game board 30 shown in FIG. When a game ball is fired in such a manner that the game ball flows down to the left game area 32, the game ball collides. Similarly, a game nail 80 is also provided above the general winning opening 35 and the first special variable winning apparatus 38, but the illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in this gaming board 30, a collision target member 83 in which the game ball that has reached the other side collides with the other side facing the one side where the game ball is launched in the game area 32. The game nail 80 is planted at a position opposite to the collision target member 83 at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game nail 80 collides with the game ball after colliding with the collided member 83. The game nail 80 is the game nail 80 with which the launched game ball collides first among the game nails 80, A guard nail 82 is formed.

  The guard nail 82 planted on the right side of the surrounding frame body 40 does not directly collide with the launched game ball like the guard nail 82 planted on the upper left side of the surrounding frame body 40. Since the launching force when the game ball is launched to the other side opposite to the one side where the game ball is launched in the region 32 is very strong, even when the game ball collides with the colliding member 83, The impact is great. For this reason, also in this case, a large burden is applied to the planted portion of the guard nail 82 in the game board 30a. In addition, the game nail 80 which collides only after colliding with other members which comprise the game board 30 other than the game nail 80 other than the to-be-collised member 83 after discharge | release may be included in the guard nail 82.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the life nail 81 is spaced a little wider than the diameter of the game ball at a position directly above the winning opening (in this case, the ordinary starting gate 34, the starting winning opening 36, and the general winning opening 35). It is a pair of game nails 80 planted. The interval between the life nails 81 affects the winning rate to the winning opening, and high dimensional accuracy is required. In other words, if the distance becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the ball will stop and it will no longer be possible to win, and it was planned that the distance will be wider than the original interval (the interval immediately after the game store has adjusted). It will be higher than the winning rate. Since the game ball after colliding with another game nail 80 collides with this life nail 81, the impact applied is smaller than that of the guard nail 82, and the burden on the life nail planting portion on the game board 30a is guard. This is smaller than the burden on the planted portion of the nail 82.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the game nail 80 includes a main body portion 80a having a predetermined length, a nail head portion 80b formed on one end side of the main body portion 80a, and a spiral portion 80c formed on the other end side of the main body portion. And a tip portion 80d formed at the tip portion of the spiral portion 80c.

  The main body 80a has a long cylindrical shape having a predetermined diameter, and a substantially hemispherical nail head 80b having a diameter larger than the diameter of the main body 80a is formed on one end side of the main body 80a. . The main body 80a and the nail head 80b are arranged in a space where the game balls in the game area 32 can flow down when the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a.

  Further, the spiral portion 80c is a portion formed continuously on the other end side of the main body portion 80a, and a plurality of grooves 80e (protrusions) extending spirally around the axial center of the game nail 80 on the peripheral surface. Part and concave part). By providing the groove 80e, when the game nail 80 is driven into the game board 30a, the groove 80e cuts the inner peripheral surface of the prepared hole 90 formed in the game board 30a, and a predetermined holding force is generated. ing. Further, the maximum diameter (a in the drawing) of the spiral portion 80c is larger than the diameter (b in the drawing) of the main body portion 80a. The screw angle formed between the extending direction of the groove 80e and the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the game nail 80 is, for example, about 55 degrees. In other words, the smaller the screw angle, the better the holding force. However, if the screw angle is too small, the pilot hole 90 will be excessively shaved when driven, and the holding force will be reduced. Therefore, the screw angle is set to about 55 degrees. Has been. The distal end portion 80d is a substantially hemispherical portion formed continuously with the spiral portion 80c, and has a smaller diameter than the maximum diameter (a in the drawing) of the spiral portion 80c.

  As shown in FIG. 112, the game nail 80 is driven into a prepared hole 90 formed in advance in the game board 30a. The pilot hole 90 has an inner diameter smaller than the maximum diameter of the spiral portion 80c of the game nail 80, and is inclined 5 degrees upward with respect to the horizontal direction. The game nail 80 is driven from the front surface of the game board 30a along the extending direction of the pilot hole 90, and is driven so that at least the entire spiral portion 80c is buried in the game board 30a. When the game nail 80 is driven, the spiral portion 80c in which the groove 80e is formed cuts the inner peripheral surface of the prepared hole 90. Thus, the game nail 80 can be driven into the pilot hole 90 having a smaller diameter than the spiral portion 80c, and a predetermined holding force is generated. Therefore, stress is generated in the pilot hole 90 of the game board 30a, and a crack may occur in the pilot hole 90 of the game board 30a due to an impact caused by repeated collision of the game balls. In particular, in the guard nail 82, since the momentum of the game balls that collide is strong, the occurrence of cracks was significant.

  Here, FIG. 112A shows the guard nail 82 and FIG. 112B shows the life nail 81. The inner diameter (c in the figure) of the pilot hole 90 of the guard nail 82 is larger than the inner diameter (d in the figure) of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81. The inner diameter (c in the figure) of the pilot hole 90 of the guard nail 82 is smaller than the maximum diameter (a in FIG. 111) in the spiral portion 80c. Further, the inner diameter (d in the figure) of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81 is larger than the diameter of the main body 80a (b in FIG. 111). That is, the size of the diameter is b <d <c <a.

  As described above, since a strong impact is repeatedly applied to the guard nail 82, a burden applied to a portion where the game nail 80 of the game board 30a is implanted is large. Therefore, by increasing the inner diameter of the pilot hole 90 within a range in which the necessary holding force can be exhibited, the stress applied to the game board 30a (the distortion of the game board 30a) can be reduced as much as possible by driving the game nail 80. It is possible to prevent the game board 30a from cracking due to repeated strong impacts. Further, although the holding force is reduced by increasing the inner diameter of the pilot hole 90, this increases the displacement of the game nail 80 due to the collision of the game balls, making it easier to absorb the impact, and this also applies to the game board 30a. The burden can be reduced, and the occurrence of cracks in the game board 30a can be prevented.

  In particular, the guard nails 82 located on the right side of the normal variation winning device 37 in the game board 30 shown in FIG. 107 are planted and connected at intervals equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and are adjacent to each other on the game board 30a. A crack that connects the pilot hole 90 to a portion between the game nails 80 is likely to occur. However, by increasing the inner diameter of the pilot hole 90, a place where the game nail 80 is implanted in such an arrangement that easily generates a crack. The occurrence of cracks in the game board 30a can be effectively prevented. Further, in the game board 30 shown in FIG. 109, when the player hits the right side, the inner diameter of the pilot hole is also increased for the guard nail 82 to which a strong impact is applied after the game ball collides with the collision target member 83. The occurrence of cracks in the game board 30a at the place where the game nail 80 is installed is prevented. Even if the displacement of the game nail 80 due to the collision of the game balls increases, the guard nail 82 does not greatly affect the winning rate, and therefore no problem occurs.

  On the other hand, since the life nail 81 is a game nail that has the greatest influence on the winning rate, dimensional accuracy is important. The state (the state adjusted by the amusement store) is prevented from changing even if there is a collision. Thereby, the stress applied to the game board 30a by driving the game nail 80 (distortion of the game board 30a) is larger than that in the case of the guard nail 82, but the life nail 81 has collided with other game nails 80. Since the subsequent game ball collides, the impact applied is smaller than that of the guard nail 82, and the distance between the pair of game nails 80 is wide and the load on the game board 30a is not so large. There will be no cracks. In this way, by setting the inner diameter of the pilot hole 90 in accordance with the function of the game nail 80, problems in the gaming machine 10 such as the occurrence of cracks in the game board 30a can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, the normal start gate 34, the start winning port 36, and the general winning port 35 are given as the winning holes in which the life nails 81 are planted directly above, but the ordinary variable winning device which is other winning ports as the winning holes. 37, the first special variation winning device 38, and the second special variation winning device 39 may be included, and the game nail 80 planted immediately above these may be used as the life nail 81. In addition, since the guard nail 82 disposed above the normal variation winning device 37 in the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 107 also has a function as a life nail 81, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 corresponds to the guard nail 82. It is good also as a diameter corresponding to the life nail 81. In this embodiment, since the winning rate to the normal variation winning device 37 does not need to be strictly controlled compared to the winning rate to the start winning port 36, the game nail 80 planted above the ordinary varying winning device 37 is provided. The diameter of the pilot hole 90 is made larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81 in order to give priority to the function as the guard nail 82, but the game nail having the functions of both the guard nail 82 and the life nail 81 is used. For 80, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 may be selected in accordance with the type or layout of the winning opening.

  Further, the inner diameter of the pilot hole 90 for the game nail 80 other than the guard nail 82 and the life nail 81 may be the same as that of the guard nail 82, the same as that of the life nail 81, or the pilot hole 90 of the guard nail 82. It may be smaller than the inner diameter of the life nail 81 and larger than the inner diameter of the pilot hole 90. Further, the game nail 80 in which the launched game ball collides first is the guard nail 82, and the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the guard nail 82 is larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81. However, not only the guard nail 82 but also the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the game nail 80 applied by the collision of the game ball is greater than a predetermined value may be made larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81. good. Here, the predetermined value is a value equal to or greater than the value of the force that may cause a crack in the game board 30a. For example, the force applied to the game nail 80 that the fired game ball collides first among the game nails 80 is determined. The value is equal to or greater than the value. The game nail 80 positioned above the position of the outlet 31b of the launched game ball may be used as the guard nail 82. In addition, since the game nails 80 that are connected and planted at intervals equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball are likely to crack, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 is not the guard nail 82 but the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81. May be larger.

  From the above, in the gaming machine 10 including the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a made of synthetic resin, the game board 30a is previously placed in a place where the game nail 80 is implanted. A hole 90 is formed, and the game nail 80 is implanted by inserting the game nail 80 into the pilot hole 90. The game nail 80 is provided with a winning opening (start winning hole 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning hole 35). The life nail 81 to be planted directly above the normal start gate 34, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39) and the fired game ball first collide among the game nails 80. The diameter of the pilot hole 90 with respect to the guard nail 82 is larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 with respect to the life nail 81.

  The game balls are fired from one side of the game board 30 toward the upper side of the game area 32 formed on the front surface of the game board 30, and a plurality of guard nails 82 are connected to the upper part of the game area 32. The game nail 80 is implanted so that the connecting direction of the guard nail 82 is substantially perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball colliding with the guard nail 82. It becomes.

  The game ball is launched from one side of the game board 30 toward the game area 32 formed on the front surface of the game board 30, and the game on the other side facing the one side where the game ball is launched. In the region 32, a collision target member 83 that collides with the game ball reaching the other side is provided, and the guard nail 82 is collided with the collision target member 83 after the game ball collides with the collision target member 83. This is the gaming nail 80 that will collide first.

  Further, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 is made larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81 for all of the guard nails 82 that the launched game balls collide first among the game nails 80. The diameter of the pilot hole 90 may be set according to the planting position.

  As shown in FIG. 113, among the guard nails 82, the guard nails 82a and 82b whose distance from adjacent game nails is a predetermined distance or more (for example, 13.5 mm or more), even if the distance slightly changes, The diameter of the pilot hole 90 is made larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81. In particular, with respect to the pilot hole 90 of the guard nail 82a that is close to the retaining hole 40a for screwing the surrounding frame body 40 to the game board 30a (for example, 11.0 mm or less), the game board 30a may be cracked. Therefore, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 is made larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81.

  Further, in the case of the guard nail 82c having a predetermined distance range (for example, 11.0 mm or more and less than 13.5 mm) with respect to the adjacent game nail 80 among the guard nails 82, similarly to the life nail 81, the game ball passes It also has a function of limiting the amount and affects the passing amount of the game ball due to the change in the interval. Therefore, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 is made the same as the diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81 with emphasis on dimensional accuracy. In addition, the guard nail 82d having a distance between the guard nail 82 and the adjacent game nail 80 that is less than a predetermined distance (for example, less than 11.0 mm) has a function of guiding the game balls along the connecting direction. Even if it changes slightly, the function is not affected, so high dimensional accuracy is not required. Further, since the distance from the adjacent game nail 80 is close, there is a high possibility that the game board 30a will be cracked. The diameter of the pilot hole 90 of the life nail 81 is made larger.

  That is, of the guard nails 82, the diameter of the pilot hole 90 with respect to the game nail 80 whose distance from the adjacent game nail is within a predetermined distance range is the same as the diameter of the pilot hole 90 with respect to the life nail 81. The diameter of the pilot hole 90 for the game nail 80 that is not within the predetermined distance range is made larger than the diameter of the pilot hole 90 for the life nail 81.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. As shown in FIG. 114, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine 10 including a gaming board 30 in which a gaming nail 80 is planted on a transparent synthetic resin gaming board 30a. A transparent sealing agent 91 is filled between the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 for driving the game nail 80 formed on the game board 30a.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming nail 80 is driven into a prepared hole 90 formed in advance in the gaming board 30a, similarly to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment described above. The game nail 80 also has the same configuration as the game nail 80 (see FIG. 111) in the third embodiment described above. When the game nail 80 is planted, it is driven from the front surface of the game board 30a along the extending direction of the lower hole 90, and at least the entire spiral portion 80c is driven so as to be buried in the game board 30a. Further, when the game nail 80 is driven, the spiral portion 80c in which the groove 80e is formed cuts the inner peripheral surface of the prepared hole 90. Thus, the game nail 80 can be driven into the pilot hole 90 having a smaller diameter than the spiral portion 80c, and a predetermined holding force is generated.

  In the game board 30a made of transparent synthetic resin, when the game nail 80 is driven, the surface of the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 is roughened and whitened, and this whitened portion is visible to the player. For some reason, it was detrimental to aesthetics. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a transparent sealant 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 so that the whitened portion is not noticeable. In addition, when there is whitening at the time of formation of the pilot hole 90, the sealant 91 is also filled in the part where the game nail 80 is not located in the pilot hole 90 or the sealant 91 is applied to the inner peripheral surface, and the whitening is performed. You may make it inconspicuous.

  Examples of the sealing agent 91 to be filled include an adhesive, a filler, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, a sealing agent, a coating agent, and the like. It is preferable to have a viscosity that allows the surface to be roughened by cutting. In particular, whitening can be made inconspicuous if it has a refractive index close to the refractive index of the material of the game board 30a.

  Further, if the game ball has elasticity after curing and absorbs the impact or vibration caused by the game ball colliding with the game nail 80, the impact of the game ball collision may cause a crack in the planted portion of the game board 30a. Can be prevented. Examples of such a material include an aqueous emulsion adhesive, a silicone filler, a silicone adhesive, and a silicone rubber. A cyanoacrylate-based adhesive can also be used, but it is preferably used in a place where impact caused by a collision of a game ball is small. It is preferable to use a liquid adhesive. Furthermore, if the replacement of the ball nail 80 when the game nail 80 is bent or bent is taken into consideration, it is preferable to use one that does not have adhesive ability or that has weak adhesive force.

  From the above, in the gaming machine 10 including the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a made of transparent synthetic resin, the game board 30a is used for driving in advance at the place where the game nail 80 is implanted. A pilot hole 90 is formed, and the game nail 80 is driven into the pilot hole 90 so that the game nail 80 is implanted, and a transparent sealing agent 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. Will be.

  Next, the first manufacturing method of the gaming machine 10 in which the transparent sealing agent 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 as described above will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), a pilot hole 90 is formed at a location where the game nail 80 of the game board 30a is to be planted. Here, the pilot hole 90 is formed so as to penetrate through the game board 30a, but the pilot hole 90 may not be penetrated. Moreover, the sealing agent 91 is apply | coated to the spiral part 80c and the front-end | tip part 80d of the game nail 80 to drive. The sealant 91 used here is a liquid sealant 91 that is transparent at least in a cured state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the game nail 80 coated with the sealing agent 91 is driven into the prepared hole 90. By applying the liquid sealant 91 and then driving it in, the sealant 91 spreads over the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 and whitening can be made inconspicuous. Further, the liquid sealant 91 also functions as a lubricant, can reduce the stress applied to the game board 30a when the game nail 80 is driven, and can prevent the game board 30a from cracking. By driving the game nail 80 in this way, a transparent sealing agent 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 as shown in FIG.

  From the above, it is a manufacturing method of the gaming machine 10 provided with the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a made of a transparent synthetic resin, where the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a. A step of forming a pilot hole 90 for driving, and a step of applying a liquid sealing agent 91 that is transparent at least in a hardened state to the tip of the game nail 80 and then driving the game nail 80 into the pilot hole 90 , Will be included.

  FIG. 116 shows a second method of manufacturing a gaming machine in which a transparent sealing agent 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. First, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), a pilot hole 90 penetrating before and after the game board 30a is formed at a place where the game nail 80 of the game board 30a is to be planted. Then, the game nail 80 is driven into the prepared hole 90, and the game nail 80 is implanted as shown in FIG. 116 (b). Thereafter, the sealing agent 91 is filled from the side opposite to the side where the game nail 80 is driven in the prepared hole 90. The sealant 91 used here is a liquid sealant 91 that is transparent at least in a cured state.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the sealing agent 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90, and the whitening can be made inconspicuous. When the sealing agent 91 is filled from the front end side of the game nail 80, the sealing agent 91 spreads over the entire inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 mainly along the groove 80e of the spiral portion 80c. Further, since the sealing agent 91 is filled from the rear side of the game board 30a, the sealing agent 91 is also applied to the inner peripheral surface of the prepared hole 90 where the gaming nail 80 is not located. The resulting whitening can be made inconspicuous. In FIG. 116C, the sealant 91 is filled to such an extent that the end of the game nail 80 is filled, but the entire prepared hole 90 may be filled with the sealant 91.

  From the above, it is a manufacturing method of the gaming machine 10 provided with the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a made of a transparent synthetic resin, where the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a. A pilot hole 90 for driving penetrating in the front and rear of the game board 30a is formed, and a game nail 80 is driven into the pilot hole 90. After the game nail 80 is driven, the game nail 80 in the pilot hole 90 is driven. And a step of filling a liquid sealant 91 that is transparent at least in a cured state from the side facing the side.

  FIG. 117 shows a modified example of the game nail 80. The game nail 80 includes a groove 80f in which a sealant 91 can be retained at a tip 80d inserted into the pilot hole 90 when driven into the game board 30a. A plurality of groove portions 80f are formed along the extending direction of the game nail 80 from the front end of the game nail 80 to the connection portion with the spiral portion 80c on the peripheral surface of the front end portion 80d.

  By having this groove portion 80f, in the first manufacturing method, it becomes possible to drive in a state where a sufficient amount of the sealing agent 91 is attached to the game nail 80, and a sufficient amount around the game nail 80. The sealing agent 91 can be spread, and the sealing agent 91 can be effectively filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. Moreover, the excess sealing agent 91 can be received in the groove 80f, and the sealing agent 91 can be prevented from leaking to the driving side.

  In the second manufacturing method, the sealing agent 91 can be efficiently fed to the spiral portion 80c via the groove 80f, and a sufficient amount of the sealing agent 91 can be distributed around the game nail 80. Thus, the sealing agent 91 can be effectively filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. When used in the second manufacturing method, the sealing agent 91 can be more effectively filled if the groove portion 80f formed in the tip portion 80d and the groove 80e formed in the spiral portion 80c are formed continuously. Can do.

  From the above, the game nail 80 includes the groove portion 80f in which the sealant 91 can be retained at the portion inserted into the prepared hole 90, and the groove portion 80f extends from the tip of the portion inserted into the prepared hole 90 over a predetermined range. The game nail 80 is formed along the extending direction.

  FIG. 118 also shows a modified example of the game nail 80. The game nail 80 includes a tip 80d inserted into the pilot hole 90 when driven into the game board 30a and a groove 80g in which the sealing agent 91 can be retained at the spiral 80c. The groove portion 80g is formed along the circumferential direction of the game nail 80, and is formed at a connection portion between the tip portion 80d and the spiral portion 80c and a central portion of the spiral portion 80c.

  Even with such a groove portion 80g, in the first manufacturing method, a sufficient amount of the sealant 91 can be driven in a state of being attached to the game nail 80, and the game nail 80 is sufficiently around the game nail 80. A sufficient amount of the sealing agent 91 can be spread, and the sealing agent 91 can be effectively filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. Moreover, the excess sealing agent 91 can be received in the groove 80g, and the sealing agent 91 can be prevented from leaking to the driving side.

  Further, in the second manufacturing method, excess sealing agent 91 can be received in the groove 80g, and the sealing agent 91 can be prevented from leaking to the driving side. Further, by providing the groove portion 80g in the central portion of the spiral portion 80c, the sealant 91 can be efficiently distributed to the rear portion of the spiral portion 80c (the portion close to the front surface of the game board 30a), and the game nail The sealing agent 91 can be effectively filled between 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, mainly. Different parts will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine 10 including a gaming board 30 in which a gaming nail 80 is implanted in a transparent synthetic resin gaming board 30a, and the gaming nail 80 is formed on the gaming board 30a. It welds to the pilot hole 90.

  FIG. 119 shows a method for manufacturing the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. Also in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming nail 80 is driven into a prepared hole 90 formed in advance in the gaming board 30a, similarly to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the pilot hole 90 formed in the game board 30a is formed in a conical shape tapered so as to reduce in diameter toward the rear surface side of the game board 30a. In addition, the game nail 80 includes a reduced diameter portion 80h that is tapered so as to become narrower toward the tip continuously from the main body portion 80a instead of the spiral portion 80c. The taper angle (θ1) of the pilot hole 90 is more obtuse than the taper angle (θ2) of the reduced diameter portion 80h of the game nail 80. Further, the diameter of the opening on the front side in the pilot hole 90 is larger than the diameter of the main body 80 a of the game nail 80.

  The inner diameter of the pilot hole 90 which is formed on the game board 30a and is reduced in diameter toward the rear side is such that the depth from the front surface of the game board 30a is longer than the length from the front end of the game nail 80 to the rear end of the reduced diameter portion 80h. Is formed so as to be equal to the diameter on the tip side of the reduced diameter portion 80h of the game nail 80 at a shallow position. Therefore, when the game nail 80 is inserted into the prepared hole 90, the distal end portion of the reduced diameter portion 80h is inserted into the prepared hole 90 before the entire reduced diameter portion 80h is inserted into the prepared hole 90 as shown in FIG. It will be in the state contact | abutted to the surrounding surface. In this state, there is a space 92 between the reduced diameter portion 80h and the pilot hole 90 as shown in FIG.

  From this state, vibration (for example, vibration by ultrasonic waves) is applied to the game nail 80 and a pressing force is applied in the insertion direction of the game nail 80, so that the game board 30a of the portion in contact with the game nail 80 on the inner peripheral surface of the lower hole 90 is provided. The game nail 80 is inserted along the direction in which the pilot hole 90 extends while melting by frictional heat, and the game nail 80 is inserted to a predetermined depth as shown in FIG. 119 (c). By driving the game nail 80 in this way, the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90 melts and bites into the game board 30a at the front end side of the game nail 80, and the melted resin of the game board 30a at the rear end side of the game nail 80. Is filled in the space 92 between the prepared hole 90 and the reduced diameter portion 80h, and the game nail 80 is welded to the game board 30a as shown in FIG. 120 (b).

  By welding the game nail 80 in this way, the game nail 80 and the game board 30a are firmly connected, and a strong holding force can be obtained. Further, by driving the game nail 80, the stress generated in the game board 30a is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game board 30a from cracking. Further, since the game nail 80 and the game board 30a are in close contact with each other, the inserted portion of the game nail 80 is not whitened, and the aesthetic appearance is not impaired.

  It should be noted that the amount of resin of the game board 30a that is rejected at the front end side of the game nail 80 by the insertion of the game nail 80 and the space 92 between the prepared hole 90 and the reduced diameter portion 80h on the rear end side of the game nail 80. It is preferable to set the shape of the pilot hole 90 and the game nail 80 so that the amount of resin to be filled is equal. Further, it is desirable that the surfaces of the reduced diameter portion 80h and the tip end portion 80d have an appropriate roughness rather than a mirror finish so that heat is easily generated by friction. The roughness may be uniform (fine irregularities) or not uniform, for example, a groove shape such as the groove 80f in FIG. Moreover, what combined them may be sufficient.

  From the above, it is a manufacturing method of the gaming machine 10 provided with the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is planted on the game board 30a made of transparent synthetic resin, where the game nail 80 of the game board 30a is planted. This includes a step of forming a pilot hole 90 for driving and a step of welding the game nail 80 and the game board 30a by applying vibration to the game nail 80 inserted into the pilot hole 90.

  Further, the pilot hole 90 is formed in a conical shape tapered so as to be reduced in diameter toward the rear surface side of the game board 30a, and the game nail 80 is tapered so that the front end portion becomes thinner toward the front end. The diameter of the opening on the front side of the game board 30a in the lower hole 90 is larger than the maximum diameter of the reduced diameter part 80h, and the taper angle of the lower hole 90 is In the process of welding the game nail 80 and the game board 30a by applying vibration to the game nail 80 inserted in the prepared hole 90 by making the angle smaller than the taper angle of the reduced diameter portion 80h of the nail 80, the game nail 80 is inserted in the insertion direction. This means that welding is performed while pressing.

  The gaming machine 10 as described above is a gaming machine 10 including a gaming board 30 in which a gaming nail 80 is planted on a transparent synthetic resin gaming board 30a, and the gaming board 30a has a gaming nail 80 implanted therein. A pilot hole 90 for driving is formed in advance in the place to be played, and the game nail 80 is implanted by driving the game nail 80 into the pilot hole 90, and transparent between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. The sealant 91 is filled.

  Here, “transparent” may be colored as well as colorless, but is preferably higher in transparency than the whitened state of transparency in the pilot hole 90. Examples of the sealing agent 91 include an adhesive, a filler, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, a sealing agent, and a coating agent. Note that “driving” includes press-fitting.

  In a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board is mounted so as to be visible through a glass plate. This game board is composed of a number of game nails, windmills and other obstacles attached to the game board, a winning device, and the like. In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, when a game nail is planted, it is driven (press-fitted) into a positioning recess formed on the surface of a wooden game board. In addition, the game nail is provided with a spiral portion (also referred to as torsion), and when the game nail is driven into the game board, it is driven while being cut so as to cut the game board, so that the game nail does not fall off from the game board. Is held by the game board.

  By the way, in recent years, a game board made of a transparent synthetic resin is considered. In the case of a game board made of transparent synthetic resin, unlike a wooden game board, it is hard to drive a game nail as it is, and a pilot hole for driving is formed so as to penetrate the game board in advance. A game nail is driven in. Thus, since a transparent synthetic resin game board is different in material and processing method from a conventional wooden game board, a game nail optimal for a transparent synthetic resin game board has been proposed (for example, a special game nail). (See Kaikai 2008-175759).

  When driving game nails with a conventional wooden game board, the game board is screwed in to cut the game board at the spiral part. However, the wooden game board is opaque, so the cut location is not visible. Therefore, there were no landscape defects. However, since the cut portion is visible in the transparent synthetic resin game board, the appearance is lost due to the pilot hole whitened by the cutting.

  Therefore, the transparent sealing agent 91 is filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90, so that the whitening of the pilot hole 90 due to the driving of the game nail 80 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to prevent the appearance of 80 planting points from being impaired.

  Further, the game nail 80 includes a groove portion 80f in which the sealant 91 can be retained at a portion inserted into the prepared hole 90. The groove portion 80f extends from the tip of the portion inserted into the prepared hole 90 to a predetermined range. It is formed along the extending direction of 80.

  Therefore, a sufficient amount of the sealant 91 can be spread around the game nail 80, and the sealant 91 can be effectively filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90. The excess sealing agent 91 can be received.

  Further, it is a manufacturing method of the gaming machine 10 provided with the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is implanted in the game board 30a made of transparent synthetic resin, and is used for driving into the place where the game nail 80 of the game board 30a is implanted. Forming a pilot hole 90 and applying a liquid sealant 91 that is transparent at least in a hardened state to the tip of the game nail 80 and then driving the game nail 80 into the pilot hole 90. It is out.

  Here, “transparent” may be colored as well as colorless, but is preferably higher in transparency than the whitened state of transparency in the pilot hole 90. Examples of the sealing agent 91 include an adhesive, a filler, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, a sealing agent, and a coating agent. Further, the curing may be a state in which the fluidity is lower than that at the time of filling and a state having elasticity. “Transparent at least in a cured state” includes not only transparent from the time of filling but also opaque at the time of filling.

  Therefore, the sealing agent 91 can be filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90, and the whitening of the pilot hole due to the driving of the game nail 80 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to avoid damaging the aesthetics of the planting site. Further, since the liquid sealing agent 91 becomes a lubricant, the stress due to driving can be reduced.

  Further, it is a manufacturing method of the gaming machine 10 provided with the game board 30 in which the game nail 80 is planted on the transparent synthetic resin game board 30a, and the game board 30a is planted at the place where the game nail 80 is planted. A pilot hole 90 for driving penetrating in the front and rear of 30a is formed, and a process of driving the game nail 80 into the pilot hole 90, and after the game nail 80 is driven, facing the side where the game nail 80 is driven in the pilot hole 90 And a step of filling a liquid sealing agent 91 that is transparent at least in a cured state.

  Here, “transparent” may be colored as well as colorless, but is preferably higher in transparency than the whitened state of transparency in the pilot hole 90. Examples of the sealing agent 91 include an adhesive, a filler, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, a sealing agent, and a coating agent. Further, the curing may be a state in which the fluidity is lower than that at the time of filling and a state having elasticity. “Transparent at least in a cured state” includes not only transparent from the time of filling but also opaque at the time of filling.

  Therefore, the sealant 91 can be filled between the game nail 80 and the inner peripheral surface of the pilot hole 90, and the whitening of the pilot hole 90 due to the driving of the game nail 80 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the planted area from being damaged. Further, the sealing agent 91 is also filled in a part of the prepared hole 90 that is closer to the back side of the game board 30a than the tip of the game nail 80, that is, a part where the game nail 80 is not present. Thus, it is possible to ensure the visibility of this portion, which was conventionally invisible in the rear despite the absence of the game nail 80 due to whitening by cutting when the pilot hole 90 was formed.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The configurations of the above-described embodiments can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 30 Game board 30a Game board 80 Game nail 80f Groove part 90 Pilot hole 91 Sealing agent

Claims (1)

A display device having a variable display unit capable of executing a variable display game; and a control device that controls the variable display game;
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device,
The variation display unit is composed of a plurality of light emitting members,
The controller is
Displaying at least one light-emitting member among the plurality of light-emitting members to be in a light-emitting state in a predetermined order every predetermined time to display that the variable display game is being executed ;
During the execution of the variable display game, the light emitting mode is switched so that a certain number of the light emitting members are in the light emitting state, and the light emitting member adjacent to the light emitting member in the light emitting state is the light emitting member to be changed to the light emitting state next. Controlling the variation display unit by repeating a predetermined light emission pattern;
The off-line symbol displayed on the display device is constituted by the number of the light emitting members equal to the certain number,
The winning symbol displayed on the display device is constituted by the number of the light emitting members greater than the certain number,
The predetermined light emission pattern includes a light emission mode representing the off symbol and a plurality of light emission modes different from the winning symbol and the off symbol and representing a plurality of changing symbols that are not stopped and displayed. In the predetermined light emission pattern, the same light emission mode should not appear more than once ,
When the variable display game is started after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the variable display game is started after the loss symbol is stopped and displayed, it is displayed next to the symbol that is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by having the same light-emission mode representing the changing symbols .

Images